WO2021077412A1 - Data transmission method and apparatus, and related device - Google Patents
Data transmission method and apparatus, and related device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2021077412A1 WO2021077412A1 PCT/CN2019/113337 CN2019113337W WO2021077412A1 WO 2021077412 A1 WO2021077412 A1 WO 2021077412A1 CN 2019113337 W CN2019113337 W CN 2019113337W WO 2021077412 A1 WO2021077412 A1 WO 2021077412A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- time point
- time
- target
- data
- network device
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
Definitions
- This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a method, device and related equipment for transmitting data.
- a beam is a communication resource, which can include wide beams, narrow beams or other types of beams. Different beams can be used as different resources. Different beams can send the same information or different information, for example, data can be transmitted. Channel, control channel or sounding signal, etc.
- the technology for forming the beam may be a beamforming (beamforming, BF) technology, and the beamforming technology can achieve higher antenna array gain by oriented in a specific direction in space.
- network equipment and terminal equipment can use high-gain antenna arrays for communication. Since both network equipment and terminal equipment can generate multiple beams, it is necessary to select a suitable beam from multiple beams for communication. For example, in downlink communication where a network device sends a signal to a terminal, it is necessary to select a suitable transmission beam for the network device and Select the appropriate receiving beam for the terminal device. In the uplink communication where the terminal device sends a signal to the network device, it is necessary to select the appropriate transmitting beam for the terminal device and the appropriate receiving beam for the network device.
- the receiving beam refers to the distribution of signal strength in different directions of the signal received by the antenna.
- the network device can send control information about the target data to be transmitted to the terminal device, and the terminal device can determine the transmission time point and the beam indication of the target data according to the control information, so that the determination can be made at the transmission time point.
- the outgoing beam performs target data transmission, but there is a data transmission failure in actual operation.
- the technical problem to be solved by this application is to provide a method, device and related equipment for transmitting data to select a suitable beam for transmission of target data, so as to improve the reliability of target data transmission.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting data, including:
- the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data.
- the second beam can be used to transmit other data with the network device.
- the first beam and the network device can be used to transmit target data, where the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the first time point and the second time
- the time interval between points, the time required for beam switching is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
- the preset threshold value, the second time point for data transmission using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, between the target time point and the first time point
- the time interval is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to switch the first beam after receiving the first control information.
- the time required for beam switching has elapsed after the second time point At the time point, it means that there is enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data.
- the target time point meets the above two conditions at the same time, it means that the first beam is in the available state, and the first beam can be used
- the target data is transmitted with the network equipment, so that even if the second beam is used at the second time point, there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point, and there will be no first beam.
- the unavailability of the beam reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
- the method further includes:
- the second beam or the third beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, and the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not meet the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point
- the time interval between points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable. The transmission of the target data failed.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data.
- the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
- the method further includes:
- the preset beam is used to communicate with the network device The transmission of the target data.
- the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- the time required for beam switching at least includes: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the antenna corresponding to the first beam when the second beam is used for data transmission, the antenna corresponding to the first beam may be in a deactivated state, and the time required for beam switching may include the time required to activate the antenna corresponding to the first beam to further ensure When the first beam is used for data transmission, the first beam is in an available state.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- the first beam information may be configured in the first control information, the first beam information may be determined according to the first control information, or the first beam information is not configured in the first control information, and
- the first control information is received by using the first beam or the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam, and the first beam for transmitting the target data can be determined according to the beam receiving the first control information, and the first beam can be used for receiving the first beam.
- the using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point includes:
- the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
- the second control information use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point.
- using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point may be performed according to the second control information received in advance, and the second control information indicates the second time point and the second time point for transmitting other data.
- the second beam may also be performed according to a preset period and a preset second beam, so that the second beam is used for data transmission at the second time point.
- the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and before the first control information from the network device is received at the first time point, further include:
- the device capability status of the terminal may be sent to the network device in advance, so that the network device determines the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching according to the device capability status of the terminal, and thus according to the preset threshold value and beam switching
- the required time to determine the beam for transmitting the target data is beneficial to improve the transmission reliability of the target data.
- the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission method, including:
- the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data.
- the second beam can be used to transmit other data with the network device, then the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval , And less than the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the second beam or the third beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, and the third beam is the same as the second beam Corresponding transmission beam, if the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, then the third beam Is the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, wherein the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the difference between the first time point and the second time point The time interval between,
- the preset threshold value, the second time point for data transmission using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, and the difference between the target time point and the first time point can be determined.
- the time interval greater than or equal to the preset threshold is greater than the first time interval, and is greater than or equal to the target interval, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold , Indicating that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data. If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the first time interval, it means that the target time point is after the second time point.
- the beam is available.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there is not enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point.
- a beam is in an unusable state, therefore, the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold and target.
- the second beam or third beam can be used to transmit target data with network equipment, which reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure due to the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission .
- the method further includes:
- the first beam and the network device are used Perform the transmission of the target data.
- the target time point when the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold value, it indicates that there is sufficient time to complete the switching of the first beam after receiving the first control information.
- the target time point is after the second time point and the time required for beam switching has elapsed, it means that there is enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data, so the target time point meets the above requirements at the same time
- the first beam is available, and the first beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device. In this way, even if the second beam is used at the second time point, it can be available after the second time point. If there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam, there will be no unavailability of the first beam, which reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
- the method further includes:
- the preset beam is used to communicate with the network device The transmission of the target data.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is not enough time to switch the first beam , And the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available, so it can be at the target time point and the first time interval.
- the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- the time required for beam switching at least includes: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- the using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point includes:
- the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
- the second control information use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point.
- the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and before the first control information from the network device is received at the first time point, further include:
- the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide yet another data transmission method, including:
- the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data.
- the second beam can be used to transmit other data with the network device, and if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold value and the first time interval, If the value is small, a preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device, and the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is not enough time to switch the first beam , And the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available, so it can be at the target time point and the first time interval.
- the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- the method further includes:
- the second beam or the third beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, and the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the method further includes:
- the first beam and the network device are used Perform the transmission of the target data.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the time required for beam switching at least includes: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- the using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point includes:
- the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
- the second control information use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point.
- the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and before the first control information from the network device is received at the first time point, further include:
- the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide yet another data transmission method, including:
- the first control information is sent to the terminal device at the first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data, at the first time point later than the first time point.
- other data can be transmitted with the terminal equipment using the second beam; if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold and the target interval, use The transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam transmit target data; wherein the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching of the terminal device, and the first time interval It is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching of the terminal device is the time required for the terminal device to switch the second beam to the first beam.
- the target time point when the time interval between the target time point and the second time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it indicates that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after receiving the first control information .
- the target time point When the target time point is after the second time point and the time required for beam switching has elapsed, it means that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data. Therefore, the target time point
- the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam can be used to transmit target data. For example, if the first beam is a transmitting beam, the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to receive the target data. If the first beam is a receiving beam, the transmitting beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to transmit the target data.
- the terminal device can have enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point, and there will be no
- the unavailability of the first beam reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
- the method further includes:
- the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam is used to transmit the target data with the terminal device using the second beam, or the third beam corresponds to The transmission beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, then The third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the terminal device may not have enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and there may be a problem with the first beam.
- the terminal device it can be determined whether the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that the terminal device has enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data.
- the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device using the second beam can be used
- the second beam is a sending beam
- the receiving beam corresponding to the second beam can be used to receive target data
- the sending beam corresponding to the second beam can be used to send the target data. Therefore, the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam is reduced, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
- the method further includes:
- the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the use performs the transmission of the target data.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely parsed by the terminal device or the terminal device does not have enough time to Switch the first beam, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet time, and the second beam of the terminal device may not be available, so
- the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam can be used to transmit target data , Improve the reliability of target data transmission.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
- the first beam information may be configured in the first control information, the first beam information may be determined according to the first control information, or the first beam information is not configured in the first control information, and
- the first control information is sent by using the first beam or the sending beam corresponding to the first beam, and the first beam for transmitting the target data may be determined according to the beam for sending the first control information.
- transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point includes:
- the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
- the method before the sending the first control information to the terminal device at the first time point, the method further includes:
- the device capability status from the terminal device may be received in advance, so as to determine the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching based on the device capability status of the terminal, so that the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching may be determined Determining the beam for transmitting the target data helps to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission method, including:
- the first control information is sent to the terminal device at the first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data, at the first time point later than the first time point.
- other data can be transmitted with the terminal device using the second beam; if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, And is less than the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device using the second beam are used for target data transmission, or the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam is used
- the terminal device using the third beam to transmit the target data the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, then the first The three beams are the receiving beams corresponding to the second beam.
- the third beam is the sending beam corresponding to the second beam; wherein, the target interval is the first The sum of the time interval and the time required for beam switching, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching of the terminal device is the time required for the terminal device to switch the first time The time required for the second beam to switch to the first beam.
- the method further includes:
- the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam is used Transmitting the target data with the terminal device using the first beam.
- the method further includes:
- the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the use performs the transmission of the target data.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
- transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point includes:
- the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
- the method before the sending the first control information to the terminal device at the first time point, the method further includes:
- the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission method, including:
- the first control information is sent to the terminal device at the first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data, at the first time point later than the first time point.
- other data can be transmitted with the terminal device using the second beam; if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is smaller than the preset threshold and the first time interval Value, the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam are used to transmit the target data.
- the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point.
- the method further includes:
- the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device uses the second beam to transmit the target data, or use the transmission corresponding to the third beam
- the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data when the beam and the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, the The third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the method further includes:
- the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam is used Transmitting the target data with the terminal device using the first beam.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
- transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point includes:
- the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
- the method before the sending the first control information to the terminal device at the first time point, the method further includes:
- an embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission device, including:
- a communication unit configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- the processing unit is configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a preset threshold and the target interval, whichever is greater.
- the communication unit uses the first beam and the network device to transmit the target data; wherein, the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is The time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, and the The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a reception beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is When a beam is received, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
- the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit uses the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point;
- the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
- the processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
- the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
- the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides another data transmission device, including:
- a communication unit configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- a processing unit configured to determine that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of a preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold The larger value of the limit value and the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, so The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the second beam is a receiving beam, Beam
- the third beam is the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching
- the first time interval is the For the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, the time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the first beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
- the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- the other data transmission unit is specifically used for:
- the processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to the preset period of transmitting the other data with the network device and the preset second beam, so that the communication unit is at the second time point Use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device;
- the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
- the processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
- the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
- the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide yet another data transmission device, including:
- a communication unit configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- a processing unit configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller of a preset threshold value and the first time interval, So that the communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device; the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, and the The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a receiving beam , Then the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the first beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit uses the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point;
- the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
- the processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
- the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
- the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides another data transmission device, including:
- a communication unit configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- the processing unit is configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a preset threshold and the target interval, whichever is greater.
- the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data; wherein, the target interval is the result of the first time interval and the beam switching of the terminal device.
- the sum of the required time lengths, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching is that the terminal device switches the second beam Is the duration required by the first beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to perform the target data with the network device using the second beam Or use the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data, where the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the network device using the preset beam to transmit the target data.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
- the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit transmits the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point;
- the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
- the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
- the communication unit is further used to:
- an embodiment of the present application also provides another data transmission device, including:
- a communication unit configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- a processing unit configured to determine if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value and the target interval A larger value of, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to transmit target data with the terminal device using the second beam, or uses the third beam to correspond
- the transmission beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, then The third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam; wherein, the The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the required time length for beam switching is The length of time required to switch the second beam to the first beam
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam to transmit the target data.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
- the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit transmits the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point;
- the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
- the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
- the communication unit is further used to:
- the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission device, including:
- a communication unit configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- a processing unit configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval
- the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam to transmit the target data; the first time interval is the first time point and the second time point The time interval between time points.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to transmit target data with the terminal device using the second beam, or uses the second beam to transmit target data.
- the transmission beam corresponding to the three beams and the terminal device that uses the third beam when transmitting the target data the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam Beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to:
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam
- the beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
- the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit transmits the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point;
- the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
- the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
- the communication unit is further used to:
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including: a processor and a memory;
- the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions
- the processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides another communication device, including: a processor and a memory;
- the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions
- the processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including: a processor and a memory;
- the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions
- the processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including: a processor and a memory;
- the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions
- the processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including a computer program or instruction, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to implement any of the aspects described in the first to third aspects The method of transferring data.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including a computer program or instruction, which when run on a computer, enables the computer to implement any aspect of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect.
- the method of transferring data is also provided.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing a computer program or instruction, which is characterized in that, when it is run on a computer, the computer realizes any aspect of the first aspect to the third aspect.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing a computer program or instruction, which is characterized in that, when it is run on a computer, the computer realizes any aspect of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a method, device, and related equipment for transmitting data.
- First control information from a network device is received at a first time point.
- the first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted and the target of the transmission target data.
- the target time point and the first time point can be determined When the time interval between is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit target data, where the target interval is the first time interval and the time required for beam switching
- the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
- the preset threshold value, the second time point of using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point can be determined at the same time. If the target time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold value, and the target time point is determined to be a time point that has passed the time required for beam switching after the second time point, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, so that even if The second beam is used at the second time point, and there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point. There will be no unavailability of the first beam, which reduces the number of The unavailable beam may cause the target data transmission to fail, and improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point when it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not satisfy the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point
- the time interval between time points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable The problem caused by the failure of the target data transmission.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data.
- the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
- the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a system framework for data transmission in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting data in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another data transmission method in an embodiment of the application.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 in an embodiment of this application.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for transmitting data, which select a suitable beam for transmission of target data to improve the reliability of target data transmission.
- pre-definition can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). There is no limitation on its specific implementation.
- line control information DCI
- RRC radio resource control
- PDCCH physical downlink control channel
- PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
- the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
- At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
- And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
- the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
- "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
- At least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or b, or c, or a and b, or a and c, or b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
- the network device can send control information about the target data to be transmitted to the terminal device.
- the terminal device can determine the transmission time point and beam indication of the target data according to the control information, so that the beam indicated in the beam indication can be used at the transmission time point.
- the transmission of target data however, there is a case of data transmission failure in actual operation.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application
- the existing data transmission protocol stipulates that the terminal device receives control information about the transmission target data at the first time point T 1 Later, when it is determined that the time offset between the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data and the first time point T 1 for receiving control information is greater than or equal to a preset threshold (threshold), the target The time point T 3 uses the indicated beam to transmit the target data.
- the preset threshold value is determined according to the terminal capability.
- the target data can be transmitted using the indicated beam at the target time point T 3 , where the threshold time point T 2 is after the first time point T 1 , and
- the time interval from the first time point T 1 is a preset threshold value.
- the terminal device uses other beams to transmit other data between the first time point T 1 and the target time point T 3 , it needs to switch the other beams to the indicated beam before using the indicated beam to transmit the target data.
- beam switching often takes a certain amount of time, especially when the two beams belong to different antenna panels, the time required for beam switching is longer, about 2 to 3 milliseconds (ms). The process may affect the subsequent transmission of target data.
- the present embodiments of the application time point of another data transmission schematic, terminal device at a second point in time T 4 with other transmission beams were other data, a second time later than the first point T 4
- the time point T 1 is earlier than the target time point T 3 , so it takes a period of time after the second time point T 4 to complete the switching of other beams to the indicated beam, and switch other beams to the indicated beam.
- the required time can be represented by ⁇ t 2
- the earliest time point to complete the beam switching is represented by the available time point T 5
- the time interval between the second time point T 4 and the available time point T 5 is the beam switching time required ⁇ t 2 .
- the time interval ⁇ t 3 between the target time point T 3 and the second time point T 4 is less than the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 , that is, the target time point T 3 is earlier than the available time point T 5 , it means before a point in time T 3 is completed beam switching in a terminal device, the beam control information at this time indicated in the unusable state, the terminal device can not be used for transmission of the beam indicate the target data, the target data may result in transmission failure.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a method, a device, and related equipment for transmitting data, which receive first control information from a network device at a first point in time, and the first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted, The target time point of transmitting the target data and the first beam used to transmit the target data.
- the target time point can be compared with When the time interval between the first time points is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit target data, and the target interval is the first time interval and beam switching The sum of the required time lengths, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
- the preset threshold value, the second time point of using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than Or equal to the preset threshold, and the target time point is the time point after the second time point that the time required for beam switching has elapsed, the first beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device, so that even at the first time point
- the second beam is used at the second time point, and there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point. There will be no unavailability of the first beam, thus reducing the Unavailability may cause the target data transmission to fail, and improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not meet the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point
- the time interval between points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable. The transmission of the target data failed.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data.
- the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
- the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- FIG. 3 a schematic diagram of a data transmission system framework provided by an embodiment of this application.
- the system includes a terminal device 120 and a network device 110, and the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 can communicate based on a beam.
- the terminal device 120 may be a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a terminal unit, a terminal station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a wireless communication device, a terminal agent, or a terminal device. Wait.
- UE user equipment
- the terminal unit may be a terminal station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a wireless communication device, a terminal agent, or a terminal device.
- the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), etc., It can be a handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device, etc., such as a chip with wireless communication function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, in-vehicle device, smart wearable device, etc.
- the terminal device 120 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a sales mobile device (Point of Sales, POS), etc.
- the terminal device 120 includes an input device, an output device, a processor, and a memory.
- the input device is used to receive the downlink information sent by the network device 110
- the output device is used to send the uplink data generated by the terminal device 120 to the network device 110
- the input device and the output device may be a radio frequency (RF) circuit.
- the circuit includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier (LNA), a duplexer, and the like.
- the memory is used to store software programs and modules, and mainly includes a program storage area and a data storage area.
- the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required by at least one function, etc.; Created data, etc.
- the memory may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
- the processor is the control center of the terminal device 120, using various interfaces and lines to connect the various components of the entire terminal device 120, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory, and calling data stored in the memory, Various functions and data processing of the terminal device 120 are realized, thereby realizing multiple services based on the terminal device 120.
- the network device 110 may include a base station, a relay station, or an access point, etc., where the base station may be a base station in a Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) network.
- the base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) can also be the NodeB (NB) in Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), or the eNodeB (Long Term Evolution, LTE). Evolutional NodeB, eNB).
- the network device 110 may also be a cloud controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN) scenario.
- CRAN Cloud Radio Access Network
- the network device 110 includes an input device, an output device, a processor, and a memory.
- the input device is used to receive the uplink information sent by the terminal device 120
- the output device is used to send the downlink data generated by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120.
- the input device and the output device may be RF circuits, which include but are not limited to antennas. , At least one amplifier, transceiver, coupler, low noise amplifier and duplexer, etc.
- the memory is used to store software programs and modules, and mainly includes a storage program area and a storage data area.
- the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required by at least one function, etc.; Created data, etc.
- the memory may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
- the processor is the control center of the network device 110, using various interfaces and lines to connect the various components of the entire network device 110, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory, and calling data stored in the memory, Realize various functions and data processing of the network device 110, thereby realizing multiple services based on the network device 110.
- the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 may be located in the future 5G network 100, or may be located in the public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) that will evolve in the future.
- PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
- the communication protocols of the two include but are not limited to GSM, CDMA, WCDMA, LTE etc.
- the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 can use an antenna to communicate, that is, the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 can use an antenna to receive and send signals.
- Both the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 have antenna elements. Multiple antenna elements can be integrated on a panel. This panel integrated with the antenna elements is called an antenna panel (which can also be represented by a panel).
- One antenna panel can generate one or more beams. Among them, multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as the same beam, one beam can include one or more antenna ports, and one or more antenna ports forming a beam can be regarded as an antenna port set.
- the embodiment of the beam in the protocol can also be a spatial filter.
- the terminal device 120 may be provided with multiple antenna panels, and different antenna panels may face different directions, so that the communication range of the terminal device 120 can cover multiple different directions.
- the antenna panel can be referred to as the transmitting antenna panel of the terminal device.
- the beam generated by the transmitting antenna panel is referred to as the transmitting beam.
- the antenna panel can be referred to as the receiving antenna panel of the terminal device.
- the beam generated by the receiving antenna panel is referred to as the receiving beam.
- the transmitting antenna panel and the receiving antenna panel of the terminal device 120 may be the same antenna panel or different antenna panels.
- an antenna panel can be controlled by one or more crystal oscillators (oscillator), a crystal oscillator can control one or more radio frequency links (RF chain), and a radio frequency link can drive one or more on the antenna panel. Antenna unit. Therefore, an antenna panel can be driven by one radio frequency link or multiple radio frequency links.
- the radio frequency link can also be called a receiving channel and/or a sending channel, a receiver branch, etc. .
- the antenna panel can also be replaced with a radio frequency link or multiple radio frequency links driving an antenna panel or one or more radio frequency links controlled by a crystal oscillator.
- the network device 110 may also be provided with multiple antenna panels with beams corresponding to the terminal device 120, so as to communicate with the terminal device 120 by using the beam corresponding to the beam used by the terminal device.
- the network device 110 can send control information about the target data to be transmitted to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 can use the control information according to the control information.
- the beam used to transmit the target data indicated by the network device 110 is determined.
- the terminal device 120 may also use the default beam to transmit data with the network device 110.
- the network device 110 can instruct the terminal device 120 to receive the target data beam through downlink control information (DCI), and the receive beam can be used to receive the physical downlink shared channel (Physical downlink shared channel). channel, PDSCH).
- DCI downlink control information
- PDSCH Physical downlink shared channel
- the PDSCH can be used to carry target data, so that the terminal device 120 can receive the target data using the indicated receiving beam.
- the DCI may be carried in a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), and the terminal device 120 may determine the receiving beam of the target data according to the Transmission Configuration Index (TCI) field in the DCI.
- TCI can include a variety of parameters, such as cell number, bandwidth part number, reference signal identifier, synchronization signal block identifier, quasi-co-location (QCL) type, etc., and the co-location relationship refers to the relationship between multiple resources. Multiple resources with the same or similar communication characteristics may adopt the same or similar communication configuration.
- the QCL type can be used to indicate the receiving beam of the target data, for example, QCL TYPE D, that is, an indication of the spatial reception parameter (spatial RX parameter), can be used to indicate the receiving beam of the target data.
- the control information may also include a target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data, and the terminal device 120 may also determine whether to use the indicated beam to transmit the target data according to the target time point T 3.
- the terminal device 120 may receive a first time point T 1 of the first control information from a network device, the first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted, the target time point transmission target data and the transmission target data utilized first beam at a second time point later than the first time T 1. 4 using the point T and the second beam transport other data network devices.
- the time offset of the terminal device 120 between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold value (threshold) and the target interval.
- the first beam and the network device 110 can be used to transmit target data, where the target interval is the first time interval ⁇ t 1 between the first time point T 1 and the second time point T 4 and the beam switching time required ⁇ t
- the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the preset threshold value threshold, the second time point T 4 of using the second beam, and the time length ⁇ t 2 required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, and the target time point T 3 and the first time point
- the time offset between points T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold (threshold), and the target time point T 3 is the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 after the second time point T 4 point case
- the terminal device 120 may utilize a first beam target data transmissions to the network device 110, so that even if the terminal device at a second time point of the second beam using T 4, it is possible after the second time point T 4 There is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam, and there will be no unavailability of the first beam, thus reducing the possibility of target data transmission failure due to the unavailability of the first beam, and improving the reliability of target data transmission .
- the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device 120 that uses the first beam to transmit target data.
- the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam.
- the beam transmits target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 uses the first beam to receive the target data.
- the time offset of the terminal device 120 between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the larger of the preset threshold value (threshold) and the target interval.
- the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device 110, and the third beam is The transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, if the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a reception beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a reception beam, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the first time interval ⁇ t 1 is the time interval between the first time point T 1 and the second time point T 4
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval ⁇ t 1 and the required time length ⁇ t 2 for beam switching.
- the required time length ⁇ t 2 is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
- the terminal device 120 has enough time to obtain the transmission Related information of the target data.
- the second beam is in the available state, so the time offset between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold (threshold) and the first time interval.
- the preset threshold threshold
- the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device 110, which reduces the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
- the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device 120 that uses the second beam to transmit target data.
- the network device 110 may use the second beam to transmit data corresponding to the second beam.
- the beam sends target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 uses the second beam to receive the target data; the network device 110 can use the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam to transmit the target data with the terminal device 120 using the third beam, for example, the first
- the network device 110 may use the transmitting beam corresponding to the third beam to send the target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 may use the third beam to receive the target data.
- the terminal device 120 at a point in time T. 3 and the time interval (time offset) between a first point in time T is smaller than a predetermined threshold (threshold) and the first time interval than the
- the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data with the network device 110.
- the first time interval ⁇ t 1 is the time interval between the first time point T 1 and the second time point T 4 .
- the preset threshold (threshold)
- the preset beam can be used to communicate with the network device 110 for target data. Transmission to improve the reliability of target data transmission.
- the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device 120 that uses the preset beam to transmit target data.
- the network device 110 may use the preset beam to send data corresponding to the preset beam.
- the beam transmits target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 receives the target data by using a preset beam.
- FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting data in an embodiment of this application.
- the method is applied to a terminal device and may include the following steps:
- the terminal device receives first control information from a network device at a first time point T 1.
- Terminal equipment and network equipment can perform data transmission, where the network equipment can include a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- the data to be transmitted between the terminal device and the network device is taken as the target data.
- the target data can be data sent by the network device to the terminal device or data sent by the terminal device to the network device. In other words, for the terminal device, the target data can be sent uplink data or received downlink data.
- the uplink data can include any one of uplink random access sequence, uplink sounding reference signal, uplink control channel demodulation reference signal, uplink data channel demodulation reference signal, uplink phase noise tracking signal, etc.; downlink data can Including synchronization signal, broadcast channel, broadcast signal demodulation signal, channel state information downlink signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), cell specific reference signal (cell specific reference signal, CS-RS), terminal specific reference signal ( user equipment specific reference signal (US-RS), downlink control channel demodulation reference signal, downlink data channel demodulation reference signal, and downlink phase noise tracking signal.
- downlink data can include synchronization signal, broadcast channel, broadcast signal demodulation signal, channel state information downlink signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), cell specific reference signal (cell specific reference signal, CS-RS), terminal specific reference signal ( user equipment specific reference signal (US-RS), downlink control channel demodulation reference signal, downlink data channel demodulation reference signal, and downlink phase noise tracking signal.
- the network device Before the terminal device and the network device transmit target data, the network device can be at a first time point T 1 Send the first control information to the terminal device to indicate the relevant parameters of the transmission target data.
- the first control information may be DCI, also known as an uplink grant (UL grant), which is carried on the PDCCH, and the corresponding target data may be carried on the physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel). , PUSCH); when the target data is downlink data received by the terminal device, the first control information may be DCI, where DCI and uplink grant have different formats, DCI is carried on PDCCH, and corresponding target data can be carried on PDSCH.
- the first control information may indicate at least one of the target data to be transmitted, the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data, and the first beam for transmitting the target data.
- the first control information may include resource information allocated for the transmission of the target data to be transmitted, such as frequency domain resources and time resources, and the resource information may be used to distinguish different data, thereby indicating the target data to be transmitted;
- a control information may also include the target time point T 3 of the target data to be transmitted, thereby indicating the transmission time information of the target data;
- the first control information may also include the transmission mode of the target data, such as modulation and coding information, multi-antenna port information, etc. , To facilitate the transmission of target data.
- the first control information may also include information about the first beam corresponding to the target data, for example, including the correspondence between the data identifier of the target data and the beam number of the first beam, thereby indicating the target data
- the transmission beam specifically, the terminal device may analyze the first control information, for example, determine the information of the first beam according to the TCI field; of course, the first control information may not include the information of the first beam corresponding to the target data.
- the beam for transmitting the target data to be transmitted can be determined according to the beam for receiving the first control information.
- the beam for receiving the first control information can be used for receiving the target data, that is, the first beam is used for receiving the first control information.
- the beam receiving the target data can also be used as the first beam, or the sending beam corresponding to the beam receiving the first control information can be used to send the target data, that is, the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam is used to receive the first control information, and then sending The beam of target data can be used as the first beam.
- the terminal device may determine whether the first beam information is configured in the first control information according to the resource control (radio resource control, RRC) configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, if tci-PresentInDCI in RRC is true, it means that DCI contains the TCI field, that is, the information that the first beam is configured in DCI; on the contrary, if tci-PresentInDCI in RRC is false, it means that DCI is not included in DCI. Contains the TCI field, that is, the information that the first beam is not configured in the DCI.
- RRC radio resource control
- the information of the first beam may include the beam number, the beam management resource number, the uplink signal resource number, the downlink signal resource number, the absolute index of the beam, the relative index of the beam, the logical index of the beam, and the index of the antenna port corresponding to the beam.
- the antenna port group index corresponding to the beam, the index of the downlink signal corresponding to the beam, the time index of the downlink synchronization signal block corresponding to the beam, the beam pair link (BPL) information, the transmission parameter (Tx parameter) corresponding to the beam, The reception parameter (Rx parameter) corresponding to the beam, the transmission weight corresponding to the beam, the weight matrix corresponding to the beam, the weight vector corresponding to the beam, the reception weight corresponding to the beam, the index of the transmission weight corresponding to the beam, the index of the weight matrix corresponding to the beam, At least one of the index of the weight vector corresponding to the beam, the index of the reception weight corresponding to the beam, the reception codebook corresponding to the beam, the transmission codebook corresponding to the beam, the index of the reception codebook corresponding to the beam, and the index of the transmission codebook corresponding to the beam.
- the above-mentioned beam number is taken as an example, and should not be used as a limitation of the beam information in the embodiment of the present application.
- the first control information may also only indicate the target data to be transmitted, but not the target time point of the transmission target data and the first beam of the transmission target data, because the target time point of the transmission target data may be predefined
- the first beam for transmitting the target data may also be predefined; the first control information may also indicate one of the target time point for transmitting the target data and the first beam for transmitting the target data, and information not indicated by the first control information It is predefined and can be found by searching.
- the terminal device After the terminal device receives the first control signal, it can obtain the target data to be transmitted and the target time point of the transmission target data by analyzing the first control signal and searching the preset information of the transmission target data. And the first beam that transmits the target data. It should be noted that it takes a certain period of time for the terminal device to analyze the first control signal, and the length of this period of time depends on the data processing capability of the terminal device.
- the terminal device After the terminal device receives the first control information, it may also need to transmit other data with the network device.
- Other data is data that is different from the target data. It can be other uplink data sent by the terminal device or other data received by the terminal device.
- Downlink data for the introduction of uplink data and downlink data, please refer to the introduction of target data.
- the beam used to transmit other data may be a second beam different from the first beam. The first beam and the second beam may be set on the same antenna panel or on different antenna panels.
- the time point at which the terminal device uses the second beam to transmit other data with the network device can be recorded as the second time point T 4 , the second time point T 4 is later than the first time point T 1 , and the second time point T 4 and the first time point T 4
- the time interval between time points T 1 is recorded as the first time interval ⁇ t 1 .
- the step of the terminal device using the second beam to transmit other data to the network device at the second time point T 4 may be performed according to the second control information that the network device sends to the terminal device in advance, and the second control information may be the terminal device.
- the third time point T 0 may be earlier than the first time point T 1 , or may be later than the first time point T 1 .
- the second control information can be used to indicate the second time point T 4 for transmitting other data and/or the second beam for transmitting other data. In this way, the terminal device can use the second time point T 4 at the second time point T 4 according to the second control information.
- the beam and network equipment transmit other data.
- the second control information can be UL grant, carried on the PDCCH, and the corresponding other data can be carried on the PUSCH, that is, using the second beam to transmit other data can be specifically, using the second beam Send the PUSCH carrying other data;
- the second control information can be DCI, which is carried on the PDCCH, and the corresponding other data can be carried on the PDSCH, that is, using the second beam to transmit other data can be specific In order to use the second beam to receive the PDSCH carrying other data.
- a second terminal apparatus at the time T 4 with the second beam devices with other data transmission network, according to a preset period may be devices with other data network and a preset second beam 4 by the first at a second time point T
- the two beams transmit other data with the network equipment.
- the terminal device may report other data to the network device according to a certain period and a preset second beam, and the time point when it uses the second beam to transmit other data to the network device after receiving the first control signal is the second time point T 4 .
- the above-mentioned second time point T 4 can be one or more than one.
- the communication between the terminal device and the network device can be If other data different from the target data is transmitted multiple times, the multiple time points at which the other data is transmitted are the second time point T 4 .
- the terminal device may determine the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data to be transmitted according to the first control information, that is, the first control information indicates that the target time point T 3 is used to transmit the target using the first beam.
- the first control information indicates that the target time point T 3 is used to transmit the target using the first beam.
- Data where the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 can be recorded as the second time interval (ie time offset), the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the second time point T 4 It can be recorded as the third time interval ⁇ t 3 .
- the terminal device may The target time point T 3 uses the first beam to transmit target data with the network device. This is because after the first time point T 1 passes the preset threshold (threshold), the terminal device can parse the information of the first beam , And switch other beams originally used by the terminal device to the first beam, and then the first beam will be in an available state.
- the preset threshold threshold
- the target time point T 3 is after the threshold time point T 2 can the target data be transmitted by the first beam at the target time point T 3 , where the threshold time point T 2 is after the first time point T 1 and is equal to
- the time interval between the first time points T 1 is a preset threshold value.
- the terminal device uses the second beam at the second time point T 4 , that is, the terminal device may not be able to switch the beam immediately after analyzing and obtaining the information of the first beam, otherwise it will Affect the transmission of other data at the second time point T 4.
- the beam in order not to affect the second point in time T 4 of the second beam is used, even if the terminal device before the second time point T 4 the parsed information of the first beam, the beam can not be switched immediately, but the second The beam switching can only start after the time point T 4 , so the beam switching time length ⁇ t 2 needs to be passed after the second time point T 4 , and the first beam of the terminal device is in the available state, and the beam switching time length ⁇ t 2 The time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
- the time point at which the second beam is switched to the first beam can be recorded as the available time point T 5 , the time interval between the second time point T 4 and the available time point T 5 is the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 , in the target
- the first beam can be used to transmit the target data at the target time point T 3.
- the second time offset (time offset) between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold of the terminal device, and greater than or equal to the first time point T 1
- the first time point T 3 When the sum ( ⁇ t 1 + ⁇ t 2 ) of the first time interval ⁇ t 1 with the second time point T 4 and the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 ( ⁇ t 1 + ⁇ t 2 ), it indicates that the first beam is available.
- the first beam and the network can be used
- the equipment transmits the target data.
- the target time point T 3 satisfies: time offset ⁇ max ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1 + ⁇ t 2 ⁇
- the terminal device can use the first beam to transmit target data with the network device.
- the target data transmitted by the first beam has higher reliability.
- the second time point T 4 includes multiple, there may be multiple first time intervals ⁇ t 1 with the first time point T 1.
- the first time interval can be denoted as ⁇ t 1i , i is a positive integer less than or equal to n, and when each i satisfies time offset ⁇ max ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1i + ⁇ t 2 ⁇ , the first beam and network equipment can be used Perform target data transmission.
- switching the second beam to the first beam may be specifically switching the antenna corresponding to the second beam on the same antenna panel to the antenna corresponding to the first beam Antenna, the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 is the time required for antenna switching.
- the terminal device generally uses only one antenna panel at the same time, the other antenna panels can be in a deactivation state or activated but The state where data cannot be transferred.
- switching the second beam to the first beam can be specifically as activating the antenna panel where the first beam is located, and switching the antenna panel where the second beam is located to the antenna panel where the first beam is located Antenna panel, and switch the antenna corresponding to the second beam to the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 is the time required to activate the antenna panel where the first beam is located, the time required for antenna panel switching, and antenna switching The length of time required.
- switching the second beam to the first beam can be specifically: switching the antenna panel where the second beam is located to the antenna panel where the first beam is located, and setting the second beam corresponding to the The antenna is switched to the antenna corresponding to the first beam, and the time required for beam switching ⁇ t 2 includes the time required for antenna panel switching and the time required for antenna switching.
- the antenna panel can also be replaced with a radio frequency link or multiple radio frequency links that drive an antenna panel, or one or more radio frequency links controlled by a crystal oscillator
- the aforementioned antenna panel where the first beam is activated can be replaced by the activation One or more radio frequency links corresponding to the first beam, switch the antenna panel corresponding to the second beam to the antenna panel where the first beam is located, or switch one or more radio frequency links corresponding to the second beam to One or more radio frequency links corresponding to the first beam, so that switching from the second beam to the first beam is realized by switching the radio frequency link.
- the preset threshold used to determine the transmission target data and the time required for beam switching are determined according to the device capability status of the terminal device. The stronger the data processing capability of the terminal device, the smaller the preset threshold value, the terminal device The faster the beam switching speed is, the shorter the time required for beam switching.
- the terminal device can send the device capability status to the network device in advance, so that the network device determines the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching according to the device capability status of the terminal, and according to the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching Determine the beam used for data transmission with the terminal device.
- the network device can use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device.
- the first beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device.
- the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the first beam to send the target data to the terminal device; the first beam may It is the sending beam of the terminal device, and when the terminal device uses the first beam to send target data to the network device, the network device uses the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
- the device capability status sent by the terminal device to the network device may be represented by a preset duration, and the preset duration may include ⁇ 14 symbols, 28 symbols ⁇ , that is, the time length of one time slot or two time slots, That is, the preset time length can be one time slot or two time slots.
- the subcarrier interval is 120 kHz
- the time length of one time slot is 0.25 milliseconds.
- the terminal device can also determine the preset duration according to the required duration of beam switching and the preset threshold.
- the preset duration can be greater than the sum of the required duration of beam switching and the preset threshold, so that the network terminal can determine based on the preset duration Preset the threshold value and the time required for beam switching.
- the terminal device can determine the preset time based on the sum of the time required to activate the antenna panel where the first beam is located and the time required for antenna panel switching, and the preset threshold; of course, if The time required for antenna panel switching is also relatively short, and the terminal device may also determine the preset time based on the time required to activate the antenna panel where the first beam is located and the preset threshold.
- the terminal device can use the first beam to transmit target data with the network device at the target time point T 3.
- the terminal device uses the second beam at the second time point T 4 , that is, the terminal device may not be able to switch the beam immediately after analyzing and obtaining the information of the first beam, otherwise it will Affect the transmission of other data at the second time point T 4. Therefore, usually before starting handover beam after the second time point T 4, and therefore the target point T 3 time points later than the time available T 5, the first beam will be at a point in time T 3 is in a usable state, Only then can the first beam be used to transmit the target data at the target time point T 3.
- the target time point T 3 When the target time point T 3 is earlier than the available time point T 5 , it means that the switch from the second beam to the first beam has not been completed, and the first beam is in an unavailable state. At this time, the first beam cannot be used for target data transmission. , So it is easy to cause the loss of target data.
- the second beam In a time period later than the second time point T 4 and earlier than the available time point T 5 , the second beam is in the available state. Therefore, the second beam or the third beam can be used for target data transmission, and the third beam Is the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam.
- the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam; when the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is corresponding to the second beam.
- the transmitting beam when the second beam is in the available state, the third beam is also in the available state, so as to avoid using the wrong beam to cause the loss of target data.
- the second time interval (time offset) between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is smaller than the preset threshold value or smaller than the target interval, that is, smaller than the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval.
- the first beam is in an unusable state. At this time, the first beam will no longer be used to transmit target data.
- the terminal device can use the second beam or the third beam Transfer to the target device.
- the terminal device can use the second beam or the third beam
- the target data is transmitted with the network device.
- the second beam or the third beam is in an available state, and the target data transmitted by the second beam has higher reliability.
- the first time T 1 may have a plurality of the first time interval ⁇ t 1, for example, there are n second time point T 4, the plurality of A time interval can be denoted as ⁇ t 1i , i is a positive integer less than or equal to n, and when each i satisfies time offset ⁇ max ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1i + ⁇ t 2 ⁇ and time offset ⁇ min ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1i ⁇ , You can use the second beam or the third beam to transmit target data with the network device.
- the target time point T 3 is between the threshold time point T 2 and the available time point T 5 , or between the second time point T 4 and the available time point T 5 , or at the second time point T 4
- the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit the target data with the network device.
- the second beam or the third beam can be used with the network device Perform target data transmission, as shown in Figure 6; if the threshold time point T 2 is after the second time point T 4 and before the available time point T 5 , then the target time point is after the second time point T 4 and is available Before the time point T 5 (not shown in the figure), the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device; if the threshold time point T 2 is after the available time point T 5 , the target time point T 3 After the second time point T 4 and before the threshold time point T 2 (not shown in the figure), the second beam or the third beam may be used to transmit target data with the network device.
- the network device may use the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam or the third beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device.
- the second beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device.
- the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the second beam to send the target data to the terminal device; or
- the network device may use the receiving beam corresponding to the third beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
- the terminal device may not parse the first control message or complete the switching of other beams to the first beam, so the first beam cannot be used to transmit target data.
- the target time point T 3 is earlier than the second time point T 4 , that is, when the second time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the first time interval ⁇ t 1 , it cannot The second beam is used to transmit target data, but of course the first beam cannot be used to transmit target data.
- the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data.
- the target time point T 3 satisfies: time offset ⁇ min ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1 ⁇ , the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data.
- the second time point T 4 includes multiple, there may be multiple first time intervals ⁇ t 1 between the first time point T 1 and the first time point T 1, for example, if there are n second time points T 4 , then more The first time interval can be recorded as ⁇ t 1i , i is a positive integer less than or equal to n, and when each i satisfies the time offset ⁇ min ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1i ⁇ , the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data.
- the beam may be utilized for preset data
- cached data may comprise target data, for example, the beam may be preset lowest PDCCH CORESET ID Receive beam.
- the network device may use the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device.
- the preset beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device.
- the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the preset beam to send the target data to the terminal device; the preset beam It may be the transmitting beam of the terminal device.
- the network device uses the receiving beam corresponding to the preset beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
- S103, S104, and S105 are steps corresponding to the three situations, and this step is executed when one of the execution conditions is met, and the target data transmission can be realized.
- the terminal device may receive second control information at a third time point T 0 , where the second control information is downlink control information, so as to determine to upload other data at the second time point T 4.
- the network device may also be the terminal device RRC configuration, a number of higher layer signaling to notify the terminal device parameters, for example, RRC configuration may CellGroupConfig ⁇ ... ⁇ ServingCellConfig ⁇ ... ⁇ BWP ⁇ ... ⁇ PDSCH-Config ⁇ ... ⁇ tci-StatesToAddModList, an example of TCI state#1:: ⁇ qcl-TypeD:CSI-RS#1 ⁇ in tci-StatesToAddModlist.
- Terminal device receives first control information at a first time point T 1, the first downlink control information as the control information, thereby determining reception target data at the target time point T 3.
- the network device schedules PDSCH transmission at n_ ⁇ PDSCH ⁇ time point (an exemplary expression of the target time point) through DCI format 1_1, and fills in 000 in the TCI field to indicate that the terminal should use the receiving beam corresponding to TCI#1 To receive the PDSCH.
- a second terminal apparatus at the time point T 4 other data upload.
- the terminal device first uses the preset beam for data buffering after the first time point T 1 ; when time offset ⁇ min ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1 ⁇ , uses the preset beam to receive target data; at time offset ⁇ max ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1 + ⁇ t 2 ⁇ and time offset ⁇ min ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1 ⁇ , use the second beam to receive the target data; when time offset ⁇ max ⁇ threshold, ⁇ t 1 + ⁇ t 2 ⁇ , use the first beam to receive the target data.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting data, receiving first control information from a network device at a first point in time.
- the first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted, the target time point of the target data transmission, and the transmission target.
- the first beam used by the data if the second beam is used to transmit other data to the network device at a second time point later than the first time point, the time interval between the target time point and the first time point may be greater than Or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit target data.
- the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching.
- the first time interval It is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- the preset threshold value, the second time point of using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than Or equal to the preset threshold, and the target time point is the time point after the second time point that the time required for beam switching has elapsed, the first beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device, so that even at the first time point
- the second beam is used at the second time point, and there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point. There will be no unavailability of the first beam, thus reducing the Unavailability may cause the target data transmission to fail, and improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- a flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application is applied to the network device. It can include the following steps:
- the network device 1 transmits the first control information to the terminal device at a first time point T.
- the data to be transmitted between the terminal device and the network device can be used as target data.
- the target data can be data sent by the network device to the terminal device or data sent by the terminal device to the network device.
- the target data can be sent downlink data or received uplink data.
- the first control information may indicate related parameters of the transmission target data.
- the first control information may indicate at least one of the target data to be transmitted, the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data, and the first beam for transmitting the target data.
- the first control information and the related parameters of the transmission target data indicated by the first control information reference may be made to the description in S101.
- the network device After the network device sends the first control information to the terminal device, it may also need to transmit other data with the terminal device.
- the other data is data that is different from the target data, and it can be other uplink data received by the network device, or it can be the network device. Other downstream data sent.
- the terminal device uses the second beam to transmit other data with the network device, and the corresponding network device uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to transmit other data with the terminal device.
- the beam used to transmit other data may be a second beam different from the first beam.
- the first beam and the second beam may be set on the same antenna panel or on different antenna panels.
- the step of the network device transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point T 4 may be performed according to the second control information that the network device sends to the terminal device in advance, and the second control information may be the terminal device.
- the third time point T 0 Received by the device at the third time point T 0 , the third time point T 0 may be earlier than the first time point T 1 , or may be later than the first time point T 1 .
- the second control information can be used to indicate the second time point T 4 for transmitting other data and/or the second beam for transmitting other data. In this way, the terminal device can use the second time point T 4 at the second time point T 4 according to the second control information.
- the beam and network equipment transmit other data.
- the step of transmitting other data between the network device and the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point T 4 may also be based on the preset period and the preset second beam with the terminal device for other data, at the second time point T 4 uses the second beam to transmit other data with the terminal device.
- the terminal device may report other data to the network device according to a certain period and a preset second beam, and the time point when it uses the second beam to transmit other data to the network device after receiving the first control signal is the second time point T 4 .
- the network device uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam to transmit target data to the terminal device, and it is synchronized with the terminal device to use the first beam to transmit target data to the network device. Therefore, the specific description about the time point can be referred to S103.
- the terminal device can send the device capability status to the network device in advance, so that the network device determines the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching according to the device capability status of the terminal, and the network device determines the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching
- the beam used for data transmission with the terminal device For example, when the terminal device uses the first beam to perform data transmission with the network device, the network device can use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device.
- the first beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device.
- the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the first beam to send the target data to the terminal device; the first beam may It is the sending beam of the terminal device, and when the terminal device uses the first beam to send target data to the network device, the network device uses the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
- the network device uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam or the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam to transmit target data with the terminal device.
- S204 and S205 can refer to the description of S104 and S105, which will not be repeated here.
- the target time point when the time interval between the target time point and the second time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it indicates that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after receiving the first control information .
- the target time point When the target time point is after the second time point and the time required for beam switching has elapsed, it means that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data. Therefore, the target time point
- the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam can be used to transmit target data. For example, if the first beam is a transmitting beam, the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to receive the target data. If the first beam is a receiving beam, the transmitting beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to transmit the target data.
- the terminal device can have enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point, and there will be no
- the unavailability of the first beam reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not meet the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point
- the time interval between points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable. The transmission of the target data failed.
- the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data.
- the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
- the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
- the methods and operations implemented by the terminal device can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the terminal device
- the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by It can be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) of network devices.
- each network element such as a transmitting end device or a receiving end device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function in order to realize the above-mentioned functions.
- this application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
- the embodiments of the present application can divide the transmitting end device or the receiving end device into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples.
- each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
- the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of dividing each function module corresponding to each function.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device may include a communication unit 110, and optionally, may also include a processing unit 120.
- the communication unit 110 may communicate with the outside, and the processing unit 120 is used for processing, such as determining a beam, determining a time to send data, and so on.
- the communication unit 110 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a transceiving unit.
- the communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment, or the communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the communication unit may also be called a transceiving unit, and includes a sending unit and/or a receiving unit, which are respectively used to perform the steps of sending and receiving by the network device or the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device may implement the steps or processes performed by the terminal device corresponding to the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit configured in the terminal device.
- the communication unit is used to perform the transceiving-related operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment
- the processing unit 120 is used to perform the processing related operations on the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the communication unit 110 is configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit the target data at the target time point and/or the transmission location.
- the first beam of the target data use the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- the processing unit 120 is used for:
- the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses The first beam and the network device transmit the target data; wherein, the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the first time A time interval between a point and the second time point, the time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam;
- the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, and the The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a reception beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is When receiving a beam, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam;
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
- the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam is the receiving station The receiving beam used by the first control information or the sending beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- the processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and a preset second beam, so that the communication unit is in the Using the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at a second time point;
- the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
- the processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
- the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
- the network equipment includes a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- the communication device may implement the steps or processes executed by the terminal device in the method corresponding to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method in FIG. 4.
- each unit in the communication device and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method in FIG. 4.
- the communication unit 110 in the communication device may be implemented by a transceiver in the terminal device, and the processing unit 120 in the communication device may be implemented by a processor in the terminal device.
- the communication unit 110 in the communication device may also be an input/output interface.
- the communication device may implement steps or processes corresponding to the network device in the above method embodiment.
- it may be a network device, or a chip or circuit configured in the network device.
- the communication unit 110 is used to perform the transceiving related operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment
- the processing unit 120 is used to perform the processing related operations on the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the communication unit 110 is configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit the target data at the target time point and/or the transmission location.
- the first beam of the target data use the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
- the processing unit 120 is configured to trigger the communication unit to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value and the target interval.
- Make the communication unit use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data; wherein the target interval is the beam switching between the first time interval and the terminal device
- the target interval is the beam switching between the first time interval and the terminal device
- the sum of the required time lengths, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching is the time required for the terminal device to switch the second beam The time required for switching to the first beam;
- the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to perform the target data with the network device using the second beam Or use the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data, where the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam.
- the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the network device using the preset beam to transmit the target data.
- the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam is the transmitting station The transmitting beam used by the first control information or the receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
- the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication unit is in the Transmitting the other data at a second time point with the terminal device using the second beam;
- the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
- the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
- the communication unit is further used for:
- the communication device may implement the steps or processes executed by the network device in the method corresponding to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method in FIG. 8.
- each unit in the communication device and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding flow of the method in FIG. 8.
- the communication device may implement the steps or processes executed by the network device in the method corresponding to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method in FIG. 8.
- each unit in the communication device and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding flow of the method in FIG. 8.
- the communication unit 110 in the communication device may be implemented by a transceiver in the network device
- the processing unit 120 in the communication device may be implemented by a processor in the network device.
- the transceiver may include a transmitter and/or a receiver, which respectively implement the functions of the transmitting unit and the receiving unit.
- the communication unit 110 in the communication device may also be an input/output interface.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device may be a terminal device.
- the terminal device can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 3 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, or implement the steps or processes performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
- the terminal device includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
- the terminal device further includes a memory 2030.
- the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals.
- the memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
- the terminal device may also include an antenna for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
- the above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions.
- the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010.
- the processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 9.
- the above transceiver 2020 may correspond to the communication unit in FIG. 9 and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit.
- the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
- the terminal device shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
- the operation and/or function of each module in the terminal device is to implement the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment.
- the above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
- the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
- the foregoing terminal device may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
- the terminal device may also include one or more of an input unit, a display unit, an audio circuit, a camera, and a sensor.
- the audio circuit may also include a speaker and a microphone. Wait.
- the communication device 2000 in FIG. 10 may also be a network device, for example, a base station.
- the base station can be applied to the system shown in 3 to realize the function of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, or to implement the steps or processes performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
- the base station may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DU).
- RRU remote radio unit
- BBU baseband units
- the RRU may be used as the transceiver 2020 and corresponds to the communication unit 110 in FIG. 9.
- the transceiver 2020 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a transceiver unit, etc., and it may include at least one antenna and a radio frequency unit.
- the transceiver 2020 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
- the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver or receiving circuit)
- the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit).
- the RRU part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
- the BBU part is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on.
- the RRU and BBU may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
- the BBU is the control center of the base station, which can be used as a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 120 in FIG. 9, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
- the BBU processing unit
- the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information, or configure measurement information, and so on.
- the BBU may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or can respectively support wireless access networks of different access standards. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
- the BBU also includes a storage unit 2030 and a processor 2010.
- the storage unit 2030 is used to store necessary computer programs or instructions and data.
- the processor 2010 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, used to control the base station to perform the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
- the storage unit 2030 and the processor 2010 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
- the base station shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8.
- the operation and/or function of each module in the base station is to implement the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment.
- the network equipment is not limited to the above forms, and may also be in other forms: for example, including BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU and active antenna unit (AAU); or Customer premises equipment (CPE) may also be in other forms, which is not limited in this application.
- ARU BBU and adaptive radio unit
- AAU BBU and active antenna unit
- CPE Customer premises equipment
- the above-mentioned BBU can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented internally by the network device, and the RRU can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
- the RRU can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
- the embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface.
- the processor may be used to implement the method in the foregoing method embodiment.
- the processing device may be a chip.
- the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- SoC system on chip
- CPU central processor unit
- NP network processor
- DSP digital signal processing circuit
- microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
- MCU programmable logic device
- PLD programmable logic device
- each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or a computer program or instruction in the form of software.
- the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
- the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
- the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
- the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
- the steps of the foregoing method embodiments may be completed by integrated logic circuits of hardware in the processor or computer programs or instructions in the form of software.
- the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
- DSP digital signal processor
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or implemented.
- the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
- the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
- the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
- the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
- the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
- the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
- the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
- RAM random access memory
- static random access memory static random access memory
- dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
- DRAM dynamic random access memory
- synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
- double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
- enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
- synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
- direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
- the present application also provides a computer program product containing a computer program or instruction.
- the computer program product includes: computer program code, which when the computer program code runs on a computer, causes The computer implements the data transmission method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer realizes FIG. 4 or The data transmission method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 8.
- the present application also provides a system for transmitting data, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
- the computer may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- software it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
- the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
- the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
- the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc), SSD)) etc.
- the network equipment in the foregoing device embodiments corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
- the communication unit transmits the receiving or sending in the method embodiments.
- other steps can be executed by the processing unit (processor).
- the processing unit processor
- the functions of specific units refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
- component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
- the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
- the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
- One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
- these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
- the component can be based on, for example, a signal with one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
- a signal with one or more data packets such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals
- Communicate through local and/or remote processes Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
- the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
- the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
- the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Disclosed are a data transmission method and apparatus, and a related device. The method comprises: at a first time point, receiving first control information from a network device, wherein the first control information is used for indicating target data to be transmitted, a target time point for transmitting the target data, and a first beam for transmitting the target data; at a second time point later than the first time point, a second beam being able to be utilized to transmit other data with the network device; and when a time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a larger value between a preset threshold value and a target interval, the first beam being able to be utilized to transmit the target data with the network device, with the target interval being the sum of a time interval between the first time point and the second time point and the duration required by beam switching. The possibility of a target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam is reduced, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
Description
本申请涉及通信技术领域,特别是涉及一种传输数据的方法、装置及相关设备。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a method, device and related equipment for transmitting data.
波束(beam)是一种通信资源,可以包括宽波束、窄波束或其他类型的波束,不同的波束可作为不同的资源,通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息,例如可以传输数据信道、控制信道或探测信号等。形成波束的技术可以是波束成型(beam forming,BF)技术,波束成型技术可以通过在空间上朝向特定的方向来实现更高的天线阵列增益。A beam is a communication resource, which can include wide beams, narrow beams or other types of beams. Different beams can be used as different resources. Different beams can send the same information or different information, for example, data can be transmitted. Channel, control channel or sounding signal, etc. The technology for forming the beam may be a beamforming (beamforming, BF) technology, and the beamforming technology can achieve higher antenna array gain by oriented in a specific direction in space.
在高频通信系统中,为了减少传输距离导致的信号损耗,网络设备和终端设备(user equipment,UE)可以使用高增益的天线阵列进行通信。由于网络设备和终端设备都可以产生多个波束,因此需要从多个波束中选择合适的波束进行通信,例如在网络设备向终端发送信号的下行通信中,需要为网络设备选择合适的发送波束以及为终端设备选择合适的接收波束,在终端设备向网络设备发送信号的上行通信中,需要为终端设备选择合适的发送波束以及为网络设备选择合适的接收波束,其中发射波束指经天线发射后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束指经天线接收的信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度的分布。In a high-frequency communication system, in order to reduce signal loss caused by transmission distance, network equipment and terminal equipment (user equipment, UE) can use high-gain antenna arrays for communication. Since both network equipment and terminal equipment can generate multiple beams, it is necessary to select a suitable beam from multiple beams for communication. For example, in downlink communication where a network device sends a signal to a terminal, it is necessary to select a suitable transmission beam for the network device and Select the appropriate receiving beam for the terminal device. In the uplink communication where the terminal device sends a signal to the network device, it is necessary to select the appropriate transmitting beam for the terminal device and the appropriate receiving beam for the network device. The distribution of signal strength formed in different directions in space. The receiving beam refers to the distribution of signal strength in different directions of the signal received by the antenna.
在对波束的选择过程中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送关于待传输的目标数据的控制信息,终端设备可以根据控制信息确定目标数据的传输时间点和波束指示,从而可以在传输时间点利用确定出的波束进行目标数据的传输,然而实际操作中存在数据传输失败的情况。In the process of beam selection, the network device can send control information about the target data to be transmitted to the terminal device, and the terminal device can determine the transmission time point and the beam indication of the target data according to the control information, so that the determination can be made at the transmission time point. The outgoing beam performs target data transmission, but there is a data transmission failure in actual operation.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请所要解决的技术问题是,提供一种传输数据的方法、装置及相关设备,为目标数据选择合适的波束进行传输,以提高目标数据传输的可靠性。The technical problem to be solved by this application is to provide a method, device and related equipment for transmitting data to select a suitable beam for transmission of target data, so as to improve the reliability of target data transmission.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种传输数据的方法,包括:In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting data, including:
在第一时间点接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息,第一控制信息用于指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束,在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点,可以利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,则在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。Receive first control information from the network device at a first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data. At the second time point, the second beam can be used to transmit other data with the network device. When the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, The first beam and the network device can be used to transmit target data, where the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the first time point and the second time The time interval between points, the time required for beam switching is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
也就是说,在本申请实施例中,可以同时考虑预设门限值、利用第二波束进行数据传输的第二时间点以及波束切换所需时长,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间 间隔大于或等于预设门限值时,说明在接收第一控制信息后有足够的时间去切换第一波束,在目标时间点是在第二时间点之后经过了波束切换所需时长的时间点时,说明在利用第二波束传输其他数据后有足够的时间去切换第一波束,因此目标时间点同时满足以上两个条件时,说明第一波束处于可用状态,则可以利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,这样即使在第二时间点利用了第二波束,也能够在第二时间点之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。That is to say, in the embodiment of the present application, the preset threshold value, the second time point for data transmission using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, between the target time point and the first time point When the time interval is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to switch the first beam after receiving the first control information. At the target time point, the time required for beam switching has elapsed after the second time point At the time point, it means that there is enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data. Therefore, when the target time point meets the above two conditions at the same time, it means that the first beam is in the available state, and the first beam can be used The target data is transmitted with the network equipment, so that even if the second beam is used at the second time point, there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point, and there will be no first beam. The unavailability of the beam reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value And the larger value of the target interval, the second beam or the third beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, and the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam. The transmission beam corresponding to the two beams.
本申请实施例中,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔不满足大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值的条件时,即目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,说明在到达目标时间点之前并不一定有足够的时间去切换第一波束,可能存在第一波束不可用导致的目标数据的传输失败的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, when the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not meet the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point When the time interval between points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable. The transmission of the target data failed.
因此,本申请实施例中,可以判断目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔是否大于或等于预设门限值,是否大于或等于第一时间间隔,以及是否大于或等于目标间隔,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,说明有足够的时间获取到传输目标数据的相关信息,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔,说明目标时间点在第二时间点之后,第二波束处于可用状态,因此在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第二波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, it can be determined whether the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data. If the time between the target time point and the first time point is The interval is greater than or equal to the first time interval, indicating that the target time point is after the second time point, and the second beam is in the available state, so the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold When the smaller value in the first time interval is smaller than the preset threshold value and the larger value in the target interval, the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the preset beam is used to communicate with the network device The transmission of the target data.
在本申请实施例中,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值,说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被解析或者没有足够的时间完成向第一波束的切换,而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于第一时间间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值且小于第一时间间隔时,利用预设波束与网络设备 进行目标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is insufficient time to complete the transmission to the first beam. Switch, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available at the target time point When the time interval from the first time point is less than the preset threshold and less than the first time interval, the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。In some possible implementation manners, the time required for beam switching at least includes: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
本申请实施例中,在利用第二波束进行数据传输时,第一波束对应的天线可能处于去激活状态,则波束切换所需时长可以包括激活第一波束对应的天线所需的时长,进一步确保在利用第一波束进行数据传输时,第一波束处于可用状态。In the embodiment of the present application, when the second beam is used for data transmission, the antenna corresponding to the first beam may be in a deactivated state, and the time required for beam switching may include the time required to activate the antenna corresponding to the first beam to further ensure When the first beam is used for data transmission, the first beam is in an available state.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
本申请实施例中,第一控制信息中可以配置有第一波束的信息,则根据第一控制信息可以确定第一波束的信息,或者第一控制信息中未配置有第一波束的信息,而第一控制信息是利用第一波束或第一波束对应的接收波束接收的,则可以根据接收第一控制信息的波束去确定传输目标数据的第一波束,第一波束可以是接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或该接收波束对应的发送波束。In the embodiment of the present application, the first beam information may be configured in the first control information, the first beam information may be determined according to the first control information, or the first beam information is not configured in the first control information, and The first control information is received by using the first beam or the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam, and the first beam for transmitting the target data can be determined according to the beam receiving the first control information, and the first beam can be used for receiving the first beam. The receiving beam used by the control information or the transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据,包括:In some possible implementation manners, the using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point includes:
根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的所述第二波束,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;Using the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point according to the preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and the preset second beam;
或,or,
接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Receiving second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
根据所述第二控制信息,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。According to the second control information, use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point.
本申请实施例中,在第二时间点利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,可以是根据预先接收的第二控制信息进行的,第二控制信息指示了传输其他数据的第二时间点和第二波束,也可以是根据预设周期和预设的第二波束进行,从而在第二时间点利用第二波束进行数据传输。In the embodiment of the present application, using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point may be performed according to the second control information received in advance, and the second control information indicates the second time point and the second time point for transmitting other data. The second beam may also be performed according to a preset period and a preset second beam, so that the second beam is used for data transmission at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and before the first control information from the network device is received at the first time point, further include:
向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Sending the device capability status to the network device.
本申请实施例中,可以预先向网络设备发送终端的设备能力状态,以便网络设备根据终端的设备能力状态确定预设门限值以及波束切换所需时长,从而根据预设门限值以及波束切换所需时长确定传输目标数据的波束,有利于提高目标数据的传输可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, the device capability status of the terminal may be sent to the network device in advance, so that the network device determines the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching according to the device capability status of the terminal, and thus according to the preset threshold value and beam switching The required time to determine the beam for transmitting the target data is beneficial to improve the transmission reliability of the target data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述网络设备包括云控制器、基站、中继站或接入点。In some possible implementation manners, the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
第二方面,本申请实施例还提供了另一种传输数据的方法,包括:In the second aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission method, including:
在第一时间点接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息,第一控制信息用于指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束,在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点,可以利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,则在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,则利用第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束,其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。Receive first control information from the network device at a first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data. At the second time point, the second beam can be used to transmit other data with the network device, then the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval , And less than the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the second beam or the third beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, and the third beam is the same as the second beam Corresponding transmission beam, if the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, then the third beam Is the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, wherein the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the difference between the first time point and the second time point The time interval between, and the time required for beam switching is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
也就是说,本申请实施例中,可以同时考虑预设门限值、利用第二波束进行数据传输的第二时间点以及波束切换所需时长,可以判断目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔是否大于或等于预设门限值,是否大于第一时间间隔,以及是否大于或等于目标间隔,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,说明有足够的时间获取到传输目标数据的相关信息,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔,说明目标时间点在第二时间点之后,第二波束处于可用状态。而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,说明在到达目标时间点之前并没有足够的时间去切换第一波束,第一波束处于不可用状态,因此,目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。That is to say, in the embodiment of the present application, the preset threshold value, the second time point for data transmission using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, and the difference between the target time point and the first time point can be determined. Is the time interval greater than or equal to the preset threshold, is greater than the first time interval, and is greater than or equal to the target interval, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold , Indicating that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data. If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the first time interval, it means that the target time point is after the second time point. The beam is available. When the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there is not enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point. A beam is in an unusable state, therefore, the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold and target When the interval is larger, the second beam or third beam can be used to transmit target data with network equipment, which reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure due to the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission .
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used Perform the transmission of the target data.
在本申请实施例中,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值时,说明在接收第一控制信息后有足够的时间完成第一波束的切换,在目标时间点是在第二时间点之后经过了波束切换所需时长的时间点时,说明在利用第二波束传输其他数据后有足够的时间去切换第一波束,因此目标时间点同时满足以上两个条件时,说明第一波束处于可用状态,则可以利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,这样即使在第二时间点利用了第二波束,也能够在第二时间点之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, when the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold value, it indicates that there is sufficient time to complete the switching of the first beam after receiving the first control information. When the target time point is after the second time point and the time required for beam switching has elapsed, it means that there is enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data, so the target time point meets the above requirements at the same time Under the two conditions, it means that the first beam is available, and the first beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device. In this way, even if the second beam is used at the second time point, it can be available after the second time point. If there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam, there will be no unavailability of the first beam, which reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the preset beam is used to communicate with the network device The transmission of the target data.
在本申请实施例中,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值,说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被解析或者没有足够的时间去切换第一波束,而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于第一时间间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值且小于第一时间间隔时,利用预设波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is not enough time to switch the first beam , And the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available, so it can be at the target time point and the first time interval. When the time interval between a point in time is less than the preset threshold and less than the first time interval, the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。In some possible implementation manners, the time required for beam switching at least includes: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据,包括:In some possible implementation manners, the using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point includes:
根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的所述第二波束,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;Using the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point according to the preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and the preset second beam;
或,or,
接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Receiving second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
根据所述第二控制信息,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。According to the second control information, use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and before the first control information from the network device is received at the first time point, further include:
向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Sending the device capability status to the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述网络设备包括云控制器、基站、中继站或接入点。In some possible implementation manners, the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
第三方面,本申请实施例还提供了再一种数据传输的方法,包括:In the third aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide yet another data transmission method, including:
在第一时间点接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息,第一控制信息用于指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束,在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点,可以利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,则若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,则利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔。Receive first control information from the network device at a first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data. At the second time point, the second beam can be used to transmit other data with the network device, and if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold value and the first time interval, If the value is small, a preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device, and the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point.
在本申请实施例中,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值,说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被解析或者没有足够的时间去切换第一波束,而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于第一时间间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值且小于第一时间间隔时,利用预设波束与网络设备进行目 标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is not enough time to switch the first beam , And the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available, so it can be at the target time point and the first time interval. When the time interval between a point in time is less than the preset threshold and less than the first time interval, the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value And the larger value of the target interval, the second beam or the third beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, and the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam. The transmission beam corresponding to the two beams. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used Perform the transmission of the target data. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。In some possible implementation manners, the time required for beam switching at least includes: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据,包括:In some possible implementation manners, the using the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at the second time point includes:
根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的所述第二波束,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;Using the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point according to the preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and the preset second beam;
或,or,
接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Receiving second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
根据所述第二控制信息,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。According to the second control information, use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and before the first control information from the network device is received at the first time point, further include:
向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Sending the device capability status to the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述网络设备包括云控制器、基站、中继站或接入点。In some possible implementation manners, the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
第四方面,本申请实施例还提供了又一种数据传输的方法,包括:In a fourth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide yet another data transmission method, including:
在第一时间点向终端设备发送第一控制信息,第一控制信息用于指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束,在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点,可以与使用第二波束的终端设备传输其他数据;若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时 间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则利用第一波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第一波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输;其中,目标间隔为第一时间间隔与终端设备的波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,终端设备的波束切换所需时长为终端设备将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。The first control information is sent to the terminal device at the first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data, at the first time point later than the first time point. At two time points, other data can be transmitted with the terminal equipment using the second beam; if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold and the target interval, use The transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam transmit target data; wherein the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching of the terminal device, and the first time interval It is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching of the terminal device is the time required for the terminal device to switch the second beam to the first beam.
在本申请实施例中,在目标时间点与第二时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值时,说明终端设备在接收第一控制信息后有足够的时间去切换第一波束,在目标时间点是在第二时间点之后经过了波束切换所需时长的时间点时,说明终端设备在利用第二波束传输其他数据后有足够的时间去切换第一波束,因此目标时间点同时满足以上两个条件时,说明终端设备的第一波束处于可用状态,则可以利用第一波束对应的传输波束与使用第一波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输。例如第一波束为发送波束,则可以利用第一波束对应的接收波束接收目标数据,若第一波束为接收波束,则可以利用第一波束对应的发送波束发送目标数据。In the embodiment of the present application, when the time interval between the target time point and the second time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it indicates that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after receiving the first control information , When the target time point is after the second time point and the time required for beam switching has elapsed, it means that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data. Therefore, the target time point When the above two conditions are met at the same time, indicating that the first beam of the terminal device is in an available state, the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam can be used to transmit target data. For example, if the first beam is a transmitting beam, the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to receive the target data. If the first beam is a receiving beam, the transmitting beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to transmit the target data.
这样即使在第二时间点与使用第二波束的终端设备进行了其它数据的传输,终端设备也能够在第二时间点之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。In this way, even if other data is transmitted with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point, the terminal device can have enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point, and there will be no The unavailability of the first beam reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第二波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,或利用所述第三波束对应的传输波束与时使用所述第三波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value If it is greater than the target interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam is used to transmit the target data with the terminal device using the second beam, or the third beam corresponds to The transmission beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, then The third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam.
本申请实施例中,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔不满足大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值的条件时,即目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,说明终端设备在到达目标时间点之前并不一定有足够的时间去切换第一波束,可能存在第一波束不可用导致的目标数据的传输失败的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, when the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not meet the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point When the time interval between points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that the terminal device may not have enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and there may be a problem with the first beam. The problem that the transmission of the target data fails due to usage.
因此,本申请实施例中,可以判断目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔是否大于或等于预设门限值,是否大于或等于第一时间间隔,以及是否大于或等于目标间隔,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,说明终端设备有足够的时间获取到传输目标数据的相关信息,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔,说明目标时间点在第二时间点之后,终端设备的第二波束处于可用状态,因此在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时, 可以利用第二波束对应的传输波束与使用第二波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输,例如第二波束为发送波束,则可以利用第二波束对应的接收波束接收目标数据,若第二波束为接收波束,则可以利用第二波束对应的发送波束发送目标数据。因此,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, it can be determined whether the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that the terminal device has enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data. If the time between the target time point and the first time point is The time interval is greater than or equal to the first time interval, indicating that the target time point is after the second time point, and the second beam of the terminal device is in the available state, so the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to When the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval is smaller than the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device using the second beam can be used For target data transmission, for example, the second beam is a sending beam, the receiving beam corresponding to the second beam can be used to receive target data, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the sending beam corresponding to the second beam can be used to send the target data. Therefore, the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam is reduced, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用所述预设波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the use The terminal device of the preset beam performs the transmission of the target data.
在本申请实施例中,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值,说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被终端设备解析或者终端设备没有足够的时间去切换第一波束,而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于第一时间间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,终端设备的第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值且小于第一时间间隔时,利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用预设波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely parsed by the terminal device or the terminal device does not have enough time to Switch the first beam, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet time, and the second beam of the terminal device may not be available, so When the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold and less than the first time interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam can be used to transmit target data , Improve the reliability of target data transmission.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为发送所述第一控制信息所利用的发送波束或所述发送波束对应的接收波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
本申请实施例中,第一控制信息中可以配置有第一波束的信息,则根据第一控制信息可以确定第一波束的信息,或者第一控制信息中未配置有第一波束的信息,而第一控制信息是利用第一波束或第一波束对应的发送波束发送的,则可以根据发送第一控制信息的波束去确定传输目标数据的第一波束。In the embodiment of the present application, the first beam information may be configured in the first control information, the first beam information may be determined according to the first control information, or the first beam information is not configured in the first control information, and The first control information is sent by using the first beam or the sending beam corresponding to the first beam, and the first beam for transmitting the target data may be determined according to the beam for sending the first control information.
在一些可能的实施方式中,在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据,包括:In some possible implementation manners, transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point includes:
根据与所述终端设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,在所述第二时间点与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备传输所述其他数据;Transmitting the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point according to the preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and the preset second beam;
或,or,
向所述终端设备发送第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Sending second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据。Transmit other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述在第一时间点向终端设备发送第一控制信息之前,还包括:In some possible implementation manners, before the sending the first control information to the terminal device at the first time point, the method further includes:
接收来自所述终端设备的设备能力状态,基于所述设备能力状态确定所述预设门限值以及所述波束切换所需时长。Receiving the device capability state from the terminal device, and determining the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching based on the device capability state.
本申请实施例中,可以预先接收来自终端设备的设备能力状态,从而基于终端的设备能力状态确定预设门限值以及波束切换所需时长,以便根据预设门限值以及波束切换所需时长确定传输目标数据的波束,有利于提高目标数据的传输可靠性。In the embodiments of the present application, the device capability status from the terminal device may be received in advance, so as to determine the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching based on the device capability status of the terminal, so that the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching may be determined Determining the beam for transmitting the target data helps to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
第五方面,本申请实施例还提供了又一种数据传输的方法,包括:In the fifth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission method, including:
在第一时间点向终端设备发送第一控制信息,第一控制信息用于指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束,在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点,可以与使用第二波束的终端设备传输其他数据;若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则利用第二波束对应的传输波束与使用第二波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输,或利用所述第三波束对应的传输波束与时使用所述第三波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束;其中,目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,终端设备的波束切换所需时长为终端设备将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。The first control information is sent to the terminal device at the first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data, at the first time point later than the first time point. At two time points, other data can be transmitted with the terminal device using the second beam; if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, And is less than the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device using the second beam are used for target data transmission, or the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam is used At that time, the terminal device using the third beam to transmit the target data, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, then the first The three beams are the receiving beams corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is the receiving beam, the third beam is the sending beam corresponding to the second beam; wherein, the target interval is the first The sum of the time interval and the time required for beam switching, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching of the terminal device is the time required for the terminal device to switch the first time The time required for the second beam to switch to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第一波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第一波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam is used Transmitting the target data with the terminal device using the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用预设波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the use The terminal device of the preset beam performs the transmission of the target data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为发送所述第一控制信息所利用的发送波束或所述发送波束对应的接收波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据,包括:In some possible implementation manners, transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point includes:
根据与所述终端设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,在所述第二时间点与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备传输所述其他数据;Transmitting the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point according to the preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and the preset second beam;
或,or,
向所述终端设备发送第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Sending second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据。Transmit other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述在第一时间点向终端设备发送第一控制信息之前,还包括:In some possible implementation manners, before the sending the first control information to the terminal device at the first time point, the method further includes:
接收来自所述终端设备的设备能力状态,基于所述设备能力状态确定所述预设门限值以及所述波束切换所需时长。Receiving the device capability state from the terminal device, and determining the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching based on the device capability state.
第六方面,本申请实施例还提供了又一种数据传输的方法,包括:In the sixth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission method, including:
在第一时间点向终端设备发送第一控制信息,第一控制信息用于指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束,在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点,可以与使用第二波束的终端设备传输其他数据;若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,则利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用预设波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。其中,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔。The first control information is sent to the terminal device at the first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate the target time point for transmitting the target data and/or the first beam for transmitting the target data, at the first time point later than the first time point. At two time points, other data can be transmitted with the terminal device using the second beam; if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is smaller than the preset threshold and the first time interval Value, the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam are used to transmit the target data. Wherein, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第二波束对应的传输波束与使用第二波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,或利用所述第三波束对应的传输波束与时使用所述第三波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value If it is greater than the target interval, use the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device using the second beam to transmit the target data, or use the transmission corresponding to the third beam The terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data when the beam and the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, the The third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第一波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第一波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam is used Transmitting the target data with the terminal device using the first beam. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为发送所述第一控制信息所利用的发送波束或所述发送波束对应的接收波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据,包括:In some possible implementation manners, transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point includes:
根据与所述终端设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,在所述第二时间点与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备传输所述其他数据;Transmitting the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point according to the preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and the preset second beam;
或,or,
向所述终端设备发送第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Sending second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;
在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据。Transmit other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述在第一时间点向终端设备发送第一控制信息之前,还包括:In some possible implementation manners, before the sending the first control information to the terminal device at the first time point, the method further includes:
接收来自所述终端设备的设备能力状态,基于所述设备能力状态确定所述预设门 限值以及所述波束切换所需时长。Receiving the device capability state from the terminal device, and determining the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching based on the device capability state.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种数据传输的装置,包括:In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission device, including:
通信单元,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;A communication unit, configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元,用于若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长。The processing unit is configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a preset threshold and the target interval, whichever is greater The communication unit uses the first beam and the network device to transmit the target data; wherein, the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is The time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold Value and the larger value of the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, and the The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a reception beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is When a beam is received, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。In some possible implementation manners, the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit uses the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point;
或,所述通信单元还用于:接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示待传输的所述其他数据、传输所述其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;则,Or, the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
所述处理单元还用于:根据所述第二控制信息,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。The processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述通信单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
在所述第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Before receiving the first control information from the network device at the first time point, send the device capability status to the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述网络设备包括云控制器、基站、中继站或接入点。In some possible implementation manners, the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
第八方面,本申请实施例还提供了另一种传输数据的装置,包括:In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides another data transmission device, including:
通信单元,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;A communication unit, configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元,用于若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长。A processing unit, configured to determine that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of a preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold The larger value of the limit value and the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, so The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a receiving beam, Beam, the third beam is the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam; wherein, the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the For the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, the time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the first beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。In some possible implementation manners, the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述其他数据传输单元具体用于:In some possible implementation manners, the other data transmission unit is specifically used for:
所述处理单元还用于:根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;The processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to the preset period of transmitting the other data with the network device and the preset second beam, so that the communication unit is at the second time point Use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device;
或,所述通信单元还用于:接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示待传输的所述其他数据、传输所述其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;则,Or, the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
所述处理单元还用于:根据所述第二控制信息,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。The processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述通信单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
在所述第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Before receiving the first control information from the network device at the first time point, send the device capability status to the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述网络设备包括云控制器、基站、中继站或接入点。In some possible implementation manners, the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
第九方面,本申请实施例还提供了再一种传输数据的装置,包括:In a ninth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide yet another data transmission device, including:
通信单元,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;A communication unit, configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元,用于若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输;所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔。A processing unit, configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller of a preset threshold value and the first time interval, So that the communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device; the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold Value and the larger value of the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, and the The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a receiving beam , Then the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the first beam to transmit the target data with the network device. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。In some possible implementation manners, the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或, 所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit uses the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point;
或,所述通信单元还用于:接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示待传输的所述其他数据、传输所述其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;则,Or, the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
所述处理单元还用于:根据所述第二控制信息,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。The processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述通信单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
在所述第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Before receiving the first control information from the network device at the first time point, send the device capability status to the network device.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述网络设备包括云控制器、基站、中继站或接入点。In some possible implementation manners, the network device includes a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
第十方面,本申请实施例还提供了又一种传输数据的装置,包括:In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides another data transmission device, including:
通信单元,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;A communication unit, configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元,用于若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用第一波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第一波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与终端设备的波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为所述终端设备将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长。The processing unit is configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a preset threshold and the target interval, whichever is greater The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data; wherein, the target interval is the result of the first time interval and the beam switching of the terminal device. The sum of the required time lengths, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching is that the terminal device switches the second beam Is the duration required by the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用第二波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第二波束的所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,或利用所述第三波束对应的传输波束与时使用所述第三波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold Value and the larger value of the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to perform the target data with the network device using the second beam Or use the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data, where the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam. The transmission beam corresponding to the two beams.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用所述预设波束的所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the network device using the preset beam to transmit the target data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为发送所述第一控制信息所利用的发送波束或所述发送波束对应的接收波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述通信单元还用于:根据与所述终端设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备传输所述其他数据;In some possible implementation manners, the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit transmits the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point;
或,所述通信单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Or, the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
则所述处理单元还用于:触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据。Then the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述通信单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the communication unit is further used to:
接收来自所述终端设备的设备能力状态,基于所述设备能力状态确定所述预设门限值以及所述波束切换所需时长。Receiving the device capability state from the terminal device, and determining the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching based on the device capability state.
第十一方面,本申请实施例还提供了又一种传输数据的装置,包括:In the eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides another data transmission device, including:
通信单元,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;A communication unit, configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元,用于若确定目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用第二波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第二波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输,或利用所述第三波束对应的传输波束与时使用所述第三波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长。A processing unit, configured to determine if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value and the target interval A larger value of, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to transmit target data with the terminal device using the second beam, or uses the third beam to correspond The transmission beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam, then The third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam; wherein, the The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the required time length for beam switching is The length of time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用所述预设波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam to transmit the target data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第一波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第一波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为发送所述第一控制信息所利用的发送波束或所述发送波束对应的接收波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述通信单元还用于:根据与所述终端设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备传输所述其他数据;In some possible implementation manners, the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit transmits the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point;
或,所述通信单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Or, the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
则所述处理单元还用于:触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据。Then the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述通信单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the communication unit is further used to:
接收来自所述终端设备的设备能力状态,基于所述设备能力状态确定所述预设门限值以及所述波束切换所需时长。Receiving the device capability state from the terminal device, and determining the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching based on the device capability state.
第十二方面,本申请实施例还提供了又一种传输数据的装置,包括:In the twelfth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide another data transmission device, including:
通信单元,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;A communication unit, configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元,用于若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用所述预设波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输;所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔。A processing unit, configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device using the preset beam to transmit the target data; the first time interval is the first time point and the second time point The time interval between time points.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用第二波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第二波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输,或利用所述第三波束对应的传输波束与时使用所述第三波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value and the The larger value in the target interval triggers the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to transmit target data with the terminal device using the second beam, or uses the second beam to transmit target data. The transmission beam corresponding to the three beams and the terminal device that uses the third beam when transmitting the target data, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a transmission beam Beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is a sending beam corresponding to the second beam. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述处理单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the processing unit is further configured to:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第一波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第一波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输。其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the required time for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为发送所述第一控制信息所利用的发送波束或所述发送波束对应的接收波束。In some possible implementation manners, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam The beam is a transmitting beam used for transmitting the first control information or a receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述通信单元还用于:根据与所述终端设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备传输所述其他数据;In some possible implementation manners, the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication The unit transmits the other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point;
或,所述通信单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Or, the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
则所述处理单元还用于:触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据。Then the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
在一些可能的实施方式中,所述通信单元还用于:In some possible implementation manners, the communication unit is further used to:
接收来自所述终端设备的设备能力状态,基于所述设备能力状态确定所述预设门限值以及所述波束切换所需时长。Receiving the device capability state from the terminal device, and determining the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching based on the device capability state.
第十三方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including: a processor and a memory;
所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序或指令;The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions;
所述处理器,用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,实现第一方面至第三方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。The processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
第十四方面,本申请实施例还提供了另一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides another communication device, including: a processor and a memory;
所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序或指令;The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions;
所述处理器,用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,实现第四方面至第六方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。The processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect.
第十五方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,包括:处理器和存储器;In a fifteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including: a processor and a memory;
所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序或指令;The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions;
所述处理器,用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,实现第一方面至第三方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。The processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
第十六方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,包括:处理器和存储器;In a sixteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including: a processor and a memory;
所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序或指令;The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions;
所述处理器,用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或指令,实现第四方面至第六方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。The processor is configured to execute the computer program or instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method described in any one of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect.
第十七方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机程序 或指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现第一方面至第三方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including a computer program or instruction, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to implement any of the aspects described in the first to third aspects The method of transferring data.
第十八方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机程序或指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现第四方面至第六方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。In an eighteenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including a computer program or instruction, which when run on a computer, enables the computer to implement any aspect of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect. The method of transferring data.
第十九方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种包含计算机程序或指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现第一方面至第三方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。In the nineteenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing a computer program or instruction, which is characterized in that, when it is run on a computer, the computer realizes any aspect of the first aspect to the third aspect. The method of transferring data described above.
第二十方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种包含计算机程序或指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现第四方面至第六方面任意一方面所述的传输数据的方法。In the twentieth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing a computer program or instruction, which is characterized in that, when it is run on a computer, the computer realizes any aspect of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect. The method of transferring data described above.
本申请实施例提供了一种传输数据的方法、装置及相关设备,在第一时间点接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息,第一控制信息可以指示待传输的目标数据、传输目标数据的目标时间点以及传输目标数据所利用的第一波束,若在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点利用了第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,则可以在确定目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,其中目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,第一时间间隔为第一时间点和第二时间点之间的时间间隔,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。The embodiments of the present application provide a method, device, and related equipment for transmitting data. First control information from a network device is received at a first time point. The first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted and the target of the transmission target data. The time point and the first beam used to transmit the target data. If the second beam is used to transmit other data to the network device at a second time point later than the first time point, the target time point and the first time point can be determined When the time interval between is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit target data, where the target interval is the first time interval and the time required for beam switching The first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
也就是说,本申请实施例中,可以同时考虑预设门限值、利用第二波束的第二时间点以及波束切换所需时长,在确定目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,且确定目标时间点是在第二时间点之后经过了波束切换所需时长的时间点的情况下,利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,这样即使在第二时间点利用了第二波束,也能够在第二时间点之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,减少了因第一波束不可用导致目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。That is to say, in the embodiment of the present application, the preset threshold value, the second time point of using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point can be determined at the same time. If the target time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold value, and the target time point is determined to be a time point that has passed the time required for beam switching after the second time point, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, so that even if The second beam is used at the second time point, and there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point. There will be no unavailability of the first beam, which reduces the number of The unavailable beam may cause the target data transmission to fail, and improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
本申请实施例中,在确定目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔不满足大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值的条件时,即目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,说明在到达目标时间点之前并不一定有足够的时间去切换第一波束,可能存在第一波束不可用导致的目标数据的传输失败的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, when it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not satisfy the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point When the time interval between time points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable The problem caused by the failure of the target data transmission.
因此,本申请实施例中,可以判断目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔是否大于或等于预设门限值,是否大于或等于第一时间间隔,以及是否大于或等于目标间隔,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,说明有足够的时间获取到传输目标数据的相关信息,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔,说明目标时间点在第二时间点之后,第二波束处于可用状态,因此在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时 间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第二波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, it can be determined whether the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data. If the time between the target time point and the first time point is The interval is greater than or equal to the first time interval, indicating that the target time point is after the second time point, and the second beam is in the available state, so the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold When the smaller value in the first time interval is smaller than the preset threshold value and the larger value in the target interval, the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
在本申请实施例中,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值,说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被解析或者没有足够的时间完成向第一波束的切换,而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于第一时间间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值且小于第一时间间隔时,利用预设波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is insufficient time to complete the transmission to the first beam. Switch, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available at the target time point When the time interval from the first time point is less than the preset threshold and less than the first time interval, the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例中的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请中记载的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly describe the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application, the following will briefly introduce the drawings needed in the description of the embodiments. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are only some of the implementations recorded in the present application. For example, for those of ordinary skill in the art, other drawings can be obtained based on these drawings.
图1为本申请实施例中一种数据传输时间点示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application;
图2为本申请实施例中另一种数据传输时间点示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例中一种数据传输的系统框架示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a system framework for data transmission in an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例中一种传输数据的方法的流程图;FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a method for transmitting data in an embodiment of this application;
图5为本申请实施例中又一种数据传输时间点示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例中又一种数据传输时间点示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application;
图7为本申请实施例中又一种数据传输时间点示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请实施例中另一种传输数据的方法的流程图;FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another data transmission method in an embodiment of the application;
图9为本申请实施例中一种通信设备的示意性框图;FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device in an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例中一种通信设备2000的结构示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 in an embodiment of this application.
本申请实施例提供了一种传输数据的方法和装置,为目标数据选择合适的波束进行传输,以提高目标数据传输的可靠性。The embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for transmitting data, which select a suitable beam for transmission of target data to improve the reliability of target data transmission.
在介绍本申请实施例提供的方法之前,先做出以下几点说明。Before introducing the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the following points are explained first.
第一,在本申请实施例中,“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。First, in the embodiments of this application, "pre-definition" can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). There is no limitation on its specific implementation.
第二,在下文示出的实施例中,各术语及英文缩略语,如下行控制信息(DCI)、无线资源控制(RRC)、物理下行控制信道(PDCCH)、物理下行共享信道(PDSCH)等,均为方便描述而给出的示例性举例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在已有或未来的协议中定义其它能够实现相同或相似功能的术语的可能。Second, in the embodiments shown below, the terms and abbreviations are as follows: line control information (DCI), radio resource control (RRC), physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), etc. , Which are all illustrative examples for the convenience of description, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other terms that can achieve the same or similar functions in existing or future agreements.
第三,本申请的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”等(如果存在)是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。 应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便这里描述的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的内容以外的顺序实施。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。Third, the terms "first", "second", "third", "fourth", etc. (if any) in the description and claims of this application and the above-mentioned drawings are used to distinguish similar objects. It does not have to be used to describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that the data used in this way can be interchanged under appropriate circumstances, so that the embodiments described herein can be implemented in a sequence other than the content illustrated or described herein. In addition, the terms "including" and "having" and any variations of them are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusions. For example, a process, method, system, product, or device that includes a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to those clearly listed. Those steps or units may include other steps or units that are not clearly listed or are inherent to these processes, methods, products, or equipment.
第四,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Fourth, the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第五,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或b,或c,或a和b,或a和c,或b和c,或a、b和c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。Fifth, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or b, or c, or a and b, or a and c, or b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
目前,网络设备可以向终端设备发送关于待传输的目标数据的控制信息,终端设备可以根据控制信息确定目标数据的传输时间点和波束指示,从而可以在传输时间点利用波束指示中指示的波束进行目标数据的传输,然而在实际操作中存在数据传输失败的情况。At present, the network device can send control information about the target data to be transmitted to the terminal device. The terminal device can determine the transmission time point and beam indication of the target data according to the control information, so that the beam indicated in the beam indication can be used at the transmission time point. The transmission of target data, however, there is a case of data transmission failure in actual operation.
这是因为,参考图1所示,为本申请实施例中一种数据传输时间点示意图,现有的数据传输协议中规定,终端设备在第一时间点T
1接收关于传输目标数据的控制信息后,在判断传输目标数据的目标时间点T
3与接收控制信息的第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)大于或等于一个预设门限值(threshold)时,可以在目标时间点T
3利用指示的波束传输目标数据。其中,预设门限值根据终端能力确定。也就是说,若目标时间点T
3在门限时间点T
2之后,则可以在目标时间点T
3利用指示的波束传输目标数据,其中门限时间点T
2在第一时间点T
1之后,且与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔为预设门限值。
This is because, referring to FIG. 1, which is a schematic diagram of a data transmission time point in an embodiment of this application, the existing data transmission protocol stipulates that the terminal device receives control information about the transmission target data at the first time point T 1 Later, when it is determined that the time offset between the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data and the first time point T 1 for receiving control information is greater than or equal to a preset threshold (threshold), the target The time point T 3 uses the indicated beam to transmit the target data. Among them, the preset threshold value is determined according to the terminal capability. That is, if the target time point T 3 is after the threshold time point T 2 , the target data can be transmitted using the indicated beam at the target time point T 3 , where the threshold time point T 2 is after the first time point T 1 , and The time interval from the first time point T 1 is a preset threshold value.
然而,若终端设备在第一时间点T
1和目标时间点T
3之间利用其它波束进行了其它数据的传输,则在利用指示的波束传输目标数据之前需要将其他波束切换为指示的波束,在实际操作中,波束切换往往需要一定的时间,尤其是这两个波束属于不同的天线面板上时,波束切换所需的时间更长,大约需要2~3毫秒(ms),因此波束切换的过程可能会影响后续目标数据的传输。
However, if the terminal device uses other beams to transmit other data between the first time point T 1 and the target time point T 3 , it needs to switch the other beams to the indicated beam before using the indicated beam to transmit the target data. In actual operation, beam switching often takes a certain amount of time, especially when the two beams belong to different antenna panels, the time required for beam switching is longer, about 2 to 3 milliseconds (ms). The process may affect the subsequent transmission of target data.
参考图2所示,为本申请实施例中另一种数据传输时间点示意图,终端设备在第二时间点T
4利用其它波束进行了其它数据的传输,第二时间点T
4晚于第一时间点T
1,早于目标时间点T
3,这样,在第二时间点T
4之后需要经过一段时间,才能完成其它波束向指示的波束的切换,将其他波束切换为指示的波束的波束切换所需时长可以利用Δt
2表示,完成波束切换的最早时间点利用可用时间点T
5来表示,第二时间点T
4和可用时间点T
5之间的时间间隔为波束切换所需时长Δt
2。这种情况下,若目标时间点T
3 和第二时间点T
4之间的时间间隔Δt
3小于波束切换所需时长Δt
2,即目标时间点T
3早于可用时间点T
5,则说明目标时间点T
3在终端设备完成波束切换之前,此时控制信息所指示的波束处于不可用的状态,因此终端设备无法利用指示的波束进行目标数据的传输,会导致目标数据传输失败。
Referring to FIG. 2, the present embodiments of the application time point of another data transmission schematic, terminal device at a second point in time T 4 with other transmission beams were other data, a second time later than the first point T 4 The time point T 1 is earlier than the target time point T 3 , so it takes a period of time after the second time point T 4 to complete the switching of other beams to the indicated beam, and switch other beams to the indicated beam. The required time can be represented by Δt 2 , the earliest time point to complete the beam switching is represented by the available time point T 5 , and the time interval between the second time point T 4 and the available time point T 5 is the beam switching time required Δt 2 . In this case, if the time interval Δt 3 between the target time point T 3 and the second time point T 4 is less than the time required for beam switching Δt 2 , that is, the target time point T 3 is earlier than the available time point T 5 , it means before a point in time T 3 is completed beam switching in a terminal device, the beam control information at this time indicated in the unusable state, the terminal device can not be used for transmission of the beam indicate the target data, the target data may result in transmission failure.
基于以上技术问题,本申请实施例提供了一种传输数据的方法、装置及相关设备,在第一时间点接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息,第一控制信息可以指示待传输的目标数据、传输目标数据的目标时间点以及传输目标数据所利用的第一波束,若在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点利用了第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,则可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,第一时间间隔为第一时间点和第二时间点之间的时间间隔,而波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。Based on the above technical problems, the embodiments of the present application provide a method, a device, and related equipment for transmitting data, which receive first control information from a network device at a first point in time, and the first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted, The target time point of transmitting the target data and the first beam used to transmit the target data. If the second beam is used to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point later than the first time point, the target time point can be compared with When the time interval between the first time points is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit target data, and the target interval is the first time interval and beam switching The sum of the required time lengths, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
也就是说,本申请实施例中,可以同时考虑预设门限值、利用第二波束的第二时间点以及波束切换所需时长,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,且目标时间点是在第二时间点之后经过了波束切换所需时长的时间点的情况下,利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,这样即使在第二时间点利用了第二波束,也能够在第二时间点之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,因此减少了因第一波束不可用导致目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the preset threshold value, the second time point of using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time. The time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than Or equal to the preset threshold, and the target time point is the time point after the second time point that the time required for beam switching has elapsed, the first beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device, so that even at the first time point The second beam is used at the second time point, and there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point. There will be no unavailability of the first beam, thus reducing the Unavailability may cause the target data transmission to fail, and improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
本申请实施例中,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔不满足大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值的条件时,即目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,说明在到达目标时间点之前并不一定有足够的时间去切换第一波束,可能存在第一波束不可用导致的目标数据的传输失败的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, when the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not meet the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point When the time interval between points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable. The transmission of the target data failed.
因此,本申请实施例中,可以判断目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔是否大于或等于预设门限值,是否大于或等于第一时间间隔,以及是否大于或等于目标间隔,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,说明有足够的时间获取到传输目标数据的相关信息,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔,说明目标时间点在第二时间点之后,第二波束处于可用状态,因此在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第二波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, it can be determined whether the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data. If the time between the target time point and the first time point is The interval is greater than or equal to the first time interval, indicating that the target time point is after the second time point, and the second beam is in the available state, so the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold When the smaller value in the first time interval is smaller than the preset threshold value and the larger value in the target interval, the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
在本申请实施例中,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值,说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被解析或者没有足够的时间完成向第一波束的切换,而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于第一时间间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间 点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值且小于第一时间间隔时,利用预设波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is insufficient time to complete the transmission to the first beam. Switch, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available at the target time point When the time interval from the first time point is less than the preset threshold and less than the first time interval, the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
参考图3所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的系统框架示意图,该系统包括终端设备120和网络设备110,终端设备120和网络设备110可以基于波束进行通信。Referring to FIG. 3, a schematic diagram of a data transmission system framework provided by an embodiment of this application. The system includes a terminal device 120 and a network device 110, and the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 can communicate based on a beam.
其中,终端设备120可以是用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、终端单元、终端站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、无线通信设备、终端代理或终端装置等。其中,接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、回话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)等,可以是具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备等,例如具有无线通信功能的芯片,也可以是连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备、车载设备、智能穿戴设备等。举例来说,终端设备120可以是手机、平板电脑、销售移动设备(Point of Sales,POS)等。Among them, the terminal device 120 may be a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a terminal unit, a terminal station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a wireless communication device, a terminal agent, or a terminal device. Wait. Among them, the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), etc., It can be a handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device, etc., such as a chip with wireless communication function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, in-vehicle device, smart wearable device, etc. For example, the terminal device 120 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a sales mobile device (Point of Sales, POS), etc.
终端设备120包括输入装置、输出装置、处理器和存储器。其中,输入装置用于接收网络设备110发送的下行信息,输出装置用于将终端设备120产生的上行数据发送至网络设备110,输入装置和输出装置可以为射频(Radio Frequency,RF)电路,RF电路包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器(Low Noise Amplifier,LNA)和双工器等。存储器用于存储软件程序以及模块,主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序等;存储数据区可存储根据终端设备的使用所创建的数据等。此外,存储器可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。处理器是终端设备120的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个终端设备120的各个部件,通过运行或执行存储在存储器内的软件程序和/或模块,以及调用存储在存储器内的数据,实现终端设备120的各种功能和数据处理,从而实现基于终端设备120的多种业务。The terminal device 120 includes an input device, an output device, a processor, and a memory. The input device is used to receive the downlink information sent by the network device 110, the output device is used to send the uplink data generated by the terminal device 120 to the network device 110, and the input device and the output device may be a radio frequency (RF) circuit. The circuit includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier (LNA), a duplexer, and the like. The memory is used to store software programs and modules, and mainly includes a program storage area and a data storage area. The storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required by at least one function, etc.; Created data, etc. In addition, the memory may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices. The processor is the control center of the terminal device 120, using various interfaces and lines to connect the various components of the entire terminal device 120, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory, and calling data stored in the memory, Various functions and data processing of the terminal device 120 are realized, thereby realizing multiple services based on the terminal device 120.
网络设备110可以包括基站、中继站或接入点等,其中,基站可以是全球移动通讯系统(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)或码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)网络中的基站收发信台(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)中的NodeB(NB),还可以是长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)中的eNodeB(Evolutional NodeB,eNB)。此外,网络设备110还可以是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)场景下的云控制器。The network device 110 may include a base station, a relay station, or an access point, etc., where the base station may be a base station in a Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) network. The base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) can also be the NodeB (NB) in Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), or the eNodeB (Long Term Evolution, LTE). Evolutional NodeB, eNB). In addition, the network device 110 may also be a cloud controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN) scenario.
网络设备110包括输入装置、输出装置、处理器和存储器。其中,输入装置用于接收终端设备120发送的上行信息,输出装置用于将网络设备110产生的下行数据发送至终端设备120,输入装置和输出装置可以为RF电路,RF电路包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器和双工器等。存储器用于存储软件程序以及模块,主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所 需的应用程序等;存储数据区可存储根据网络设备的使用所创建的数据等。此外,存储器可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。处理器是网络设备110的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个网络设备110的各个部件,通过运行或执行存储在存储器内的软件程序和/或模块,以及调用存储在存储器内的数据,实现网络设备110的各种功能和数据处理,从而实现基于网络设备110的多种业务。The network device 110 includes an input device, an output device, a processor, and a memory. The input device is used to receive the uplink information sent by the terminal device 120, and the output device is used to send the downlink data generated by the network device 110 to the terminal device 120. The input device and the output device may be RF circuits, which include but are not limited to antennas. , At least one amplifier, transceiver, coupler, low noise amplifier and duplexer, etc. The memory is used to store software programs and modules, and mainly includes a storage program area and a storage data area. The storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required by at least one function, etc.; Created data, etc. In addition, the memory may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices. The processor is the control center of the network device 110, using various interfaces and lines to connect the various components of the entire network device 110, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory, and calling data stored in the memory, Realize various functions and data processing of the network device 110, thereby realizing multiple services based on the network device 110.
终端设备120和网络设备110可以位于未来5G网络100中,也可以位于未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中,二者的通信协议包括但不限于GSM、CDMA、WCDMA、LTE等。The terminal device 120 and the network device 110 may be located in the future 5G network 100, or may be located in the public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) that will evolve in the future. The communication protocols of the two include but are not limited to GSM, CDMA, WCDMA, LTE etc.
终端设备120和网络设备110可以利用天线进行通信,即终端设备120和网络设备110可以利用天线进行信号的接收与发送。终端设备120和网络设备110上都具有天线单元(antenna element),多个天线单元可以集成在一个面板(panel)上,这个集成了天线单元的面板称为天线面板(也可用panel表示),每个天线面板可产生一个或多个波束(beam)。其中,具有相同或类似的通信特征的多个波束可以视为同一个波束,一个波束可以包括一个或多个天线端口,形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口可以看作是一个天线端口集,波束在协议中的体现还可以是空域滤波器(spatial filter)。The terminal device 120 and the network device 110 can use an antenna to communicate, that is, the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 can use an antenna to receive and send signals. Both the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 have antenna elements. Multiple antenna elements can be integrated on a panel. This panel integrated with the antenna elements is called an antenna panel (which can also be represented by a panel). One antenna panel can generate one or more beams. Among them, multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as the same beam, one beam can include one or more antenna ports, and one or more antenna ports forming a beam can be regarded as an antenna port set. The embodiment of the beam in the protocol can also be a spatial filter.
本申请实施例中,终端设备120可以设置有多个天线面板,不同的天线面板可以朝向不同的方向,这样可以令终端设备120的通信范围可以覆盖多个不同的方向。如果终端设备120利用某个天线面板的波束向网络设备发送上行信号,则该天线面板可以称为终端设备的发送天线面板,对应地,发送天线面板产生的波束称为发送波束。如果终端设备120利用某个天线面板的波束接收网络设备的下行信号,则该天线面板可以称为终端设备的接收天线面板,对应地,接收天线面板产生的波束称为接收波束。终端设备120的发送天线面板与接收天线面板可以是同一个天线面板,也可以是不同的天线面板。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device 120 may be provided with multiple antenna panels, and different antenna panels may face different directions, so that the communication range of the terminal device 120 can cover multiple different directions. If the terminal device 120 uses the beam of a certain antenna panel to send an uplink signal to the network device, the antenna panel can be referred to as the transmitting antenna panel of the terminal device. Correspondingly, the beam generated by the transmitting antenna panel is referred to as the transmitting beam. If the terminal device 120 uses the beam of a certain antenna panel to receive the downlink signal of the network device, the antenna panel can be referred to as the receiving antenna panel of the terminal device. Correspondingly, the beam generated by the receiving antenna panel is referred to as the receiving beam. The transmitting antenna panel and the receiving antenna panel of the terminal device 120 may be the same antenna panel or different antenna panels.
需要说明的是,一个天线面板可以由一个或多个晶振(oscillator)控制,一个晶振可以控制一个或多个射频链路(RF chain),一个射频链路可以驱动天线面板上的一个或多个天线单元,因此,一个天线面板可以由一个射频链路驱动,也可以由多个射频链路驱动,射频链路又可以称为接收通道和/或发送通道,接收机支路(receiver branch)等。天线面板还可替换为射频链路或者驱动一个天线面板的多个射频链路或者由一个晶振控制的一个或多个射频链路。It should be noted that an antenna panel can be controlled by one or more crystal oscillators (oscillator), a crystal oscillator can control one or more radio frequency links (RF chain), and a radio frequency link can drive one or more on the antenna panel. Antenna unit. Therefore, an antenna panel can be driven by one radio frequency link or multiple radio frequency links. The radio frequency link can also be called a receiving channel and/or a sending channel, a receiver branch, etc. . The antenna panel can also be replaced with a radio frequency link or multiple radio frequency links driving an antenna panel or one or more radio frequency links controlled by a crystal oscillator.
本申请实施例中,网络设备110也可以设置有多个天线面板,具有与终端设备120对应的波束,从而利用与终端设备使用的波束对应的波束与终端设备120进行通信。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device 110 may also be provided with multiple antenna panels with beams corresponding to the terminal device 120, so as to communicate with the terminal device 120 by using the beam corresponding to the beam used by the terminal device.
这样,终端设备120和网络设备110需要选择合适的波束进行通信,在对波束选择的过程中,网络设备110可以向终端设备120发送关于待传输的目标数据的控制信息,终端设备120根据控制信息确定网络设备110指示的传输目标数据所利用的波束,当然,终端设备120也可以利用默认的波束与网络设备110传输数据。举例来说,在3GPP R15中,网络设备110可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)指示终端设备120对于目标数据的接收波束,该接收波束可以用来接收物理下行共享信道(Physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH),PDSCH可以用于承载目标数据,这样终端设备120可以利用指示的接收波束可以接收目标数据。In this way, the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 need to select a suitable beam for communication. In the process of beam selection, the network device 110 can send control information about the target data to be transmitted to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 can use the control information according to the control information. The beam used to transmit the target data indicated by the network device 110 is determined. Of course, the terminal device 120 may also use the default beam to transmit data with the network device 110. For example, in 3GPP R15, the network device 110 can instruct the terminal device 120 to receive the target data beam through downlink control information (DCI), and the receive beam can be used to receive the physical downlink shared channel (Physical downlink shared channel). channel, PDSCH). The PDSCH can be used to carry target data, so that the terminal device 120 can receive the target data using the indicated receiving beam.
具体的,DCI可以承载于物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)中,终端设备120可以根据DCI中的传输配置编号(Transmission Configuration Index,TCI)字段确定目标数据的接收波束。TCI中可以包括多种参数,例如可以包括小区编号、带宽部分编号、参考信号标识、同步信号块标识、准同位(quasi-co-location,QCL)类型等,而同位关系是指多个资源之间具有相同或相似的通信特征,具有同位关系的多个资源可以采用相同或者类似的通信配置。具体实施时,可以利用QCL类型指示目标数据的接收波束,例如QCL TYPE D,即关于空间接收参数(spatial RX parameter)的指示,可以用于指示目标数据的接收波束。Specifically, the DCI may be carried in a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), and the terminal device 120 may determine the receiving beam of the target data according to the Transmission Configuration Index (TCI) field in the DCI. TCI can include a variety of parameters, such as cell number, bandwidth part number, reference signal identifier, synchronization signal block identifier, quasi-co-location (QCL) type, etc., and the co-location relationship refers to the relationship between multiple resources. Multiple resources with the same or similar communication characteristics may adopt the same or similar communication configuration. In specific implementation, the QCL type can be used to indicate the receiving beam of the target data, for example, QCL TYPE D, that is, an indication of the spatial reception parameter (spatial RX parameter), can be used to indicate the receiving beam of the target data.
控制信息中还可以包括传输目标数据的目标时间点T
3,终端设备120还可以根据目标时间点T
3确定是否利用指示的波束去传输目标数据。
The control information may also include a target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data, and the terminal device 120 may also determine whether to use the indicated beam to transmit the target data according to the target time point T 3.
具体的,终端设备120可以在第一时间点T
1接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息,第一控制信息可以指示待传输的目标数据、传输目标数据的目标时间点以及传输目标数据所利用的第一波束,在晚于第一时间点T
1的第二时间点T
4利用了第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据。
Specifically, the terminal device 120 may receive a first time point T 1 of the first control information from a network device, the first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted, the target time point transmission target data and the transmission target data utilized first beam at a second time point later than the first time T 1. 4 using the point T and the second beam transport other data network devices.
在一些可能的实施方式中,终端设备120在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)大于或等于预设门限值(threshold)和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第一波束与网络设备110进行目标数据的传输,其中目标间隔为第一时间点T
1和第二时间点T
4的第一时间间隔Δt
1与波束切换所需时长Δt
2的和,波束切换所需时长Δt
2为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。
In some possible implementation manners, the time offset of the terminal device 120 between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold value (threshold) and the target interval. When the value is large, the first beam and the network device 110 can be used to transmit target data, where the target interval is the first time interval Δt 1 between the first time point T 1 and the second time point T 4 and the beam switching time required Δt The sum of 2 , the time required for beam switching Δt 2 is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
也就是说,本申请实施例中,可以同时考虑预设门限值threshold、利用第二波束的第二时间点T
4以及波束切换所需时长Δt
2,在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)大于或等于预设门限值(threshold),且目标时间点T
3是在第二时间点T
4之后经过了波束切换所需时长Δt
2的时间点的情况下,终端设备120可以利用第一波束与网络设备110进行目标数据的传输,这样即使终端设备在第二时间点T
4利用了第二波束,也能够在第二时间点T
4之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,因此减少了因第一波束不可用导致目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。
That is to say, in the embodiment of the present application, the preset threshold value threshold, the second time point T 4 of using the second beam, and the time length Δt 2 required for beam switching can be considered at the same time, and the target time point T 3 and the first time point The time offset between points T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold (threshold), and the target time point T 3 is the time required for beam switching Δt 2 after the second time point T 4 point case, the terminal device 120 may utilize a first beam target data transmissions to the network device 110, so that even if the terminal device at a second time point of the second beam using T 4, it is possible after the second time point T 4 There is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam, and there will be no unavailability of the first beam, thus reducing the possibility of target data transmission failure due to the unavailability of the first beam, and improving the reliability of target data transmission .
此时,网络设备110可以利用第一波束对应的传输波束与使用第一波束的终端设备120进行目标数据的传输,例如第一波束为接收波束时,网络设备110可以利用第一波束对应的发送波束向终端设备120发送目标数据,而终端设备120利用第一波束接收目标数据。At this time, the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device 120 that uses the first beam to transmit target data. For example, when the first beam is a receiving beam, the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam. The beam transmits target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 uses the first beam to receive the target data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,终端设备120在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)小于预设门限值(threshold)和目标间隔中的较大值,且大于或等于预设门限值(threshold)和第一时间间隔Δt
1中的较小值时,可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备110进行目标数据的传输,第三波束是与第二波束对应的传输波束,若第二波束为发送波束,第三波束为第二波束对应的接收波束,若第二波束为接收波束,第三波束 为第二波束对应的发送波束。其中第一时间间隔Δt
1为第一时间点T
1和第二时间点T
4之间的时间间隔,目标间隔为第一时间间隔Δt
1与波束切换所需时长Δt
2的和,波束切换所需时长Δt
2为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。
In some possible implementation manners, the time offset of the terminal device 120 between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the larger of the preset threshold value (threshold) and the target interval. , And greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold (threshold) and the first time interval Δt 1 , the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device 110, and the third beam is The transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, if the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a reception beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a reception beam, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. The first time interval Δt 1 is the time interval between the first time point T 1 and the second time point T 4 , and the target interval is the sum of the first time interval Δt 1 and the required time length Δt 2 for beam switching. The required time length Δt 2 is the time required to switch the second beam to the first beam.
这是因为,在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)小于预设门限值(threshold)和目标间隔中的较大值时,说明在到达目标时间点之前并不一定有足够的时间去切换第一波束,可能存在第一波束不可用导致的目标数据的传输失败的问题。
This is because when the time offset between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the larger of the preset threshold value (threshold) and the target interval, it means that the target time is reached. There may not be enough time to switch the first beam before the point, and there may be a problem that the transmission of the target data fails due to the unavailability of the first beam.
因此,可以判断目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)是否大于或等于预设门限值(threshold),是否大于或等于第一时间间隔,以及是否大于或等于目标间隔,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)大于或等于预设门限值(threshold),说明终端设备120有足够的时间获取到传输目标数据的相关信息,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)大于或等于第一时间间隔,说明目标时间点T
3在第二时间点T
4之后,第二波束处于可用状态,因此在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)大于或等于预设门限值(threshold)和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值(threshold)和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备110进行目标数据的传输,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。
Therefore, it can be judged whether the time offset between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold value (threshold), is greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether it is greater than Or equal to the target interval. If the time offset between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold (threshold), it means that the terminal device 120 has enough time to obtain the transmission Related information of the target data. If the time offset between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the first time interval, it means that the target time point T 3 is after the second time point T 4 , The second beam is in the available state, so the time offset between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold (threshold) and the first time interval. When the value is small and smaller than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device 110, which reduces the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
此时,网络设备110可以利用第二波束对应的传输波束与使用第二波束的终端设备120进行目标数据的传输,例如第二波束为接收波束时,网络设备110可以利用第二波束对应的发送波束向终端设备120发送目标数据,而终端设备120利用第二波束接收目标数据;网络设备110可以利用第三波束对应的传输波束与使用第三波束的终端设备120进行目标数据的传输,例如第三波束为接收波束时,网络设备110可以利用第三波束对应的发送波束向终端设备120发送目标数据,而终端设备120利用第三波束接收目标数据。At this time, the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam and the terminal device 120 that uses the second beam to transmit target data. For example, when the second beam is a receiving beam, the network device 110 may use the second beam to transmit data corresponding to the second beam. The beam sends target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 uses the second beam to receive the target data; the network device 110 can use the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam to transmit the target data with the terminal device 120 using the third beam, for example, the first When the three beams are receiving beams, the network device 110 may use the transmitting beam corresponding to the third beam to send the target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 may use the third beam to receive the target data.
在一些可能的实施方式中,终端设备120在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)小于预设门限值(threshold)和第一时间间隔中的较小值时,可以利用预设波束与网络设备110进行目标数据的传输。其中第一时间间隔Δt
1为第一时间点T
1和第二时间点T
4之间的时间间隔。
In some possible embodiments, the terminal device 120 at a point in time T. 3 and the time interval (time offset) between a first point in time T is smaller than a predetermined threshold (threshold) and the first time interval than the When the value is small, the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data with the network device 110. The first time interval Δt 1 is the time interval between the first time point T 1 and the second time point T 4 .
这是因为,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔(time offset)小于预设门限值(threshold),说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被解析或者没有足够的时间去切换第一波束,而若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1的第一时间间隔Δt
1小于目标间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值(threshold)且小于第一时间间隔时,可以利用预设波束与网络设备110进行目标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。
This is because, if the time offset between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the preset threshold (threshold), it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely resolved or is not There is enough time to switch the first beam, and if the first time interval Δt 1 between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the target interval, it means that the time to use the second beam is not yet time, and the second beam Not necessarily available, so when the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than a preset threshold (threshold) and less than the first time interval, the preset beam can be used to communicate with the network device 110 for target data. Transmission to improve the reliability of target data transmission.
此时,网络设备110可以利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用预设波束的终端设备120进行目标数据的传输,例如预设波束为接收波束时,网络设备110可以利用预设波束对应 的发送波束向终端设备120发送目标数据,而终端设备120利用预设波束接收目标数据。At this time, the network device 110 may use the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the terminal device 120 that uses the preset beam to transmit target data. For example, when the preset beam is a receiving beam, the network device 110 may use the preset beam to send data corresponding to the preset beam. The beam transmits target data to the terminal device 120, and the terminal device 120 receives the target data by using a preset beam.
为了便于理解,下面对本申请实施例提供的一种传输数据的方法进行具体的示例性说明。请参考图4,图4为本申请实施例中一种传输数据的方法的流程图,该方法应用于终端设备,可以包括以下步骤:For ease of understanding, a specific exemplary description of a method for transmitting data provided in an embodiment of the present application is given below. Please refer to FIG. 4, which is a flowchart of a method for transmitting data in an embodiment of this application. The method is applied to a terminal device and may include the following steps:
S101,终端设备在第一时间点T
1接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息。
S101, the terminal device receives first control information from a network device at a first time point T 1.
终端设备和网络设备可以进行数据的传输,其中,网络设备可以包括基站、中继站或接入点。将终端设备和网络设备之间待传输的数据作为目标数据,目标数据可以是网络设备向终端设备发送的数据,也可以是终端设备向网络设备发送的数据。也就是说,对于终端设备来说,目标数据可以是发送的上行数据,也可以是接收的下行数据。Terminal equipment and network equipment can perform data transmission, where the network equipment can include a base station, a relay station, or an access point. The data to be transmitted between the terminal device and the network device is taken as the target data. The target data can be data sent by the network device to the terminal device or data sent by the terminal device to the network device. In other words, for the terminal device, the target data can be sent uplink data or received downlink data.
举例来说,上行数据可以包括上行随机接入序列、上行探测参考信号、上行控制信道解调参考信号、上行数据信道解调参考信号、上行相位噪声跟踪信号等中的任意一种;下行数据可以包括同步信号、广播信道、广播信号解调信号、信道状态信息下行信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、小区专用参考信号(cell specific reference signal,CS-RS)、终端专用参考信号(user equipment specific reference signal,US-RS)、下行控制信道解调参考信号,下行数据信道解调参考信号,下行相位噪声跟踪信号中任意一种。For example, the uplink data can include any one of uplink random access sequence, uplink sounding reference signal, uplink control channel demodulation reference signal, uplink data channel demodulation reference signal, uplink phase noise tracking signal, etc.; downlink data can Including synchronization signal, broadcast channel, broadcast signal demodulation signal, channel state information downlink signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), cell specific reference signal (cell specific reference signal, CS-RS), terminal specific reference signal ( user equipment specific reference signal (US-RS), downlink control channel demodulation reference signal, downlink data channel demodulation reference signal, and downlink phase noise tracking signal.
参考图5、6和7所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输方法中各个时间点示意图,在终端设备和网络设备进行目标数据的传输之前,网络设备可以在第一时间点T
1向终端设备发送第一控制信息,来指示传输目标数据的相关参数。在目标数据为终端设备发送的上行数据时,第一控制信息可以是DCI,又称为上行许可(UL grant),承载于PDCCH,相应的目标数据可以承载于物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH);在目标数据为终端设备接收的下行数据时,第一控制信息可以是DCI,这里的DCI与上行许可具有不同的格式,DCI承载于PDCCH,相应的目标数据可以承载于PDSCH。
Referring to Figures 5, 6 and 7, there are schematic diagrams of various time points in a data transmission method provided in this embodiment of the present application. Before the terminal device and the network device transmit target data, the network device can be at a first time point T 1 Send the first control information to the terminal device to indicate the relevant parameters of the transmission target data. When the target data is uplink data sent by a terminal device, the first control information may be DCI, also known as an uplink grant (UL grant), which is carried on the PDCCH, and the corresponding target data may be carried on the physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel). , PUSCH); when the target data is downlink data received by the terminal device, the first control information may be DCI, where DCI and uplink grant have different formats, DCI is carried on PDCCH, and corresponding target data can be carried on PDSCH.
第一控制信息可以指示待传输的目标数据、传输目标数据的目标时间点T
3以及传输目标数据的第一波束的至少一个。具体的,第一控制信息中可以包括为待传输的目标数据传输而分配的资源信息,例如频域资源和时间资源,资源信息可以用于区分不同的数据,从而指示待传输的目标数据;第一控制信息中也可以包括传输目标数据的目标时间点T
3,从而指示目标数据的传输时间信息;第一控制信息中还可以包括目标数据的传输方式,例如调制编码信息、多天线端口信息等,便于目标数据的传输。
The first control information may indicate at least one of the target data to be transmitted, the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data, and the first beam for transmitting the target data. Specifically, the first control information may include resource information allocated for the transmission of the target data to be transmitted, such as frequency domain resources and time resources, and the resource information may be used to distinguish different data, thereby indicating the target data to be transmitted; A control information may also include the target time point T 3 of the target data to be transmitted, thereby indicating the transmission time information of the target data; the first control information may also include the transmission mode of the target data, such as modulation and coding information, multi-antenna port information, etc. , To facilitate the transmission of target data.
关于传输目标数据的第一波束,第一控制信息中还可以包括目标数据对应的第一波束的信息,例如包括目标数据的数据标识和第一波束的波束编号的对应关系,从而指示目标数据的传输波束,具体的,终端设备可以通过对第一控制信息进行解析,例如根据TCI字段确定第一波束的信息;当然,第一控制信息中也可以不包括目标数据对应的第一波束的信息,此时传输待传输的目标数据的波束可以根据接收第一控制信息的波束确定,例如可以利用接收第一控制信息的波束进行目标数据的接收,即接收第一控制信息利用了第一波束,则接收目标数据的波束也可以作为第一波束,也可以利用接收第一控制信息的波束对应的发送波束进行目标数据的发送,即接收第一控制信息利用了第一波束对应的接收波束, 则发送目标数据的波束可以作为第一波束。Regarding the first beam for transmitting target data, the first control information may also include information about the first beam corresponding to the target data, for example, including the correspondence between the data identifier of the target data and the beam number of the first beam, thereby indicating the target data The transmission beam, specifically, the terminal device may analyze the first control information, for example, determine the information of the first beam according to the TCI field; of course, the first control information may not include the information of the first beam corresponding to the target data. At this time, the beam for transmitting the target data to be transmitted can be determined according to the beam for receiving the first control information. For example, the beam for receiving the first control information can be used for receiving the target data, that is, the first beam is used for receiving the first control information. The beam receiving the target data can also be used as the first beam, or the sending beam corresponding to the beam receiving the first control information can be used to send the target data, that is, the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam is used to receive the first control information, and then sending The beam of target data can be used as the first beam.
终端设备可以根据网络设备为终端设备配置的资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),来确定第一控制信息中是否配置有第一波束的信息。举例来说,若RRC中的tci-PresentInDCI为true,则表示DCI中含有TCI字段,即DCI中配置了第一波束的信息;相反,若RRC中的tci-PresentInDCI为false,则表示DCI中不含有TCI字段,即DCI中未配置有第一波束的信息。The terminal device may determine whether the first beam information is configured in the first control information according to the resource control (radio resource control, RRC) configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, if tci-PresentInDCI in RRC is true, it means that DCI contains the TCI field, that is, the information that the first beam is configured in DCI; on the contrary, if tci-PresentInDCI in RRC is false, it means that DCI is not included in DCI. Contains the TCI field, that is, the information that the first beam is not configured in the DCI.
事实上,第一波束的信息可以包括波束编号、波束管理资源编号,上行信号资源号,下行信号资源号、波束的绝对索引、波束的相对索引、波束的逻辑索引、波束对应的天线端口的索引、波束对应的天线端口组索引、波束对应的下行信号的索引、波束对应的下行同步信号块的时间索引、波束对连接(beam pair link,BPL)信息、波束对应的发送参数(Tx parameter)、波束对应的接收参数(Rx parameter)、波束对应的发送权重、波束对应的权重矩阵、波束对应的权重向量、波束对应的接收权重、波束对应的发送权重的索引、波束对应的权重矩阵的索引、波束对应的权重向量的索引、波束对应的接收权重的索引、波束对应的接收码本、波束对应的发送码本、波束对应的接收码本的索引、波束对应的发送码本的索引中的至少一种,上述以波束编号作为示例,不应该作为本申请实施例对波束的信息的限定。In fact, the information of the first beam may include the beam number, the beam management resource number, the uplink signal resource number, the downlink signal resource number, the absolute index of the beam, the relative index of the beam, the logical index of the beam, and the index of the antenna port corresponding to the beam. , The antenna port group index corresponding to the beam, the index of the downlink signal corresponding to the beam, the time index of the downlink synchronization signal block corresponding to the beam, the beam pair link (BPL) information, the transmission parameter (Tx parameter) corresponding to the beam, The reception parameter (Rx parameter) corresponding to the beam, the transmission weight corresponding to the beam, the weight matrix corresponding to the beam, the weight vector corresponding to the beam, the reception weight corresponding to the beam, the index of the transmission weight corresponding to the beam, the index of the weight matrix corresponding to the beam, At least one of the index of the weight vector corresponding to the beam, the index of the reception weight corresponding to the beam, the reception codebook corresponding to the beam, the transmission codebook corresponding to the beam, the index of the reception codebook corresponding to the beam, and the index of the transmission codebook corresponding to the beam One, the above-mentioned beam number is taken as an example, and should not be used as a limitation of the beam information in the embodiment of the present application.
当然,第一控制信息也可以仅指示待传输的目标数据,而不指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和传输目标数据的第一波束,这是因为传输目标数据的目标时间点可以是预先定义的,传输目标数据的第一波束也可以是预先定义的;第一控制信息也可以指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和传输目标数据的第一波束中的一个,而第一控制信息未指示的信息是预先定义的,可以通过查找得到。Of course, the first control information may also only indicate the target data to be transmitted, but not the target time point of the transmission target data and the first beam of the transmission target data, because the target time point of the transmission target data may be predefined The first beam for transmitting the target data may also be predefined; the first control information may also indicate one of the target time point for transmitting the target data and the first beam for transmitting the target data, and information not indicated by the first control information It is predefined and can be found by searching.
因此,在终端设备在接收第一控制信号之后,通过对第一控制信号进行解析,以及对传输目标数据的预设信息的查找,从而可以得到待传输的目标数据、传输目标数据的目标时间点以及传输目标数据的第一波束。需要说明的是,终端设备对第一控制信号进行解析需要一定的时间,这段时间的长短根据终端设备的数据处理能力而定。Therefore, after the terminal device receives the first control signal, it can obtain the target data to be transmitted and the target time point of the transmission target data by analyzing the first control signal and searching the preset information of the transmission target data. And the first beam that transmits the target data. It should be noted that it takes a certain period of time for the terminal device to analyze the first control signal, and the length of this period of time depends on the data processing capability of the terminal device.
S102,终端设备在第二时间点T
4利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据。
S102, the terminal device at a second point in time T 4 with the second beam and other data transmission network equipment.
终端设备在接收第一控制信息之后,与网络设备还可以有传输其他数据的需求,其他数据是不同于目标数据的数据,可以是终端设备发送的其他上行数据,也可以是终端设备接收的其他下行数据,关于上行数据和下行数据的介绍,可以参考对目标数据的介绍。本申请实施例中,传输其他数据所利用的波束可以是不同于第一波束的第二波束,第一波束和第二波束可以设置于同一天线面板上,也可以设置于不同天线面板上。After the terminal device receives the first control information, it may also need to transmit other data with the network device. Other data is data that is different from the target data. It can be other uplink data sent by the terminal device or other data received by the terminal device. Downlink data, for the introduction of uplink data and downlink data, please refer to the introduction of target data. In the embodiments of the present application, the beam used to transmit other data may be a second beam different from the first beam. The first beam and the second beam may be set on the same antenna panel or on different antenna panels.
终端设备利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据的时间点可以记为第二时间点T
4,第二时间点T
4晚于第一时间点T
1,且第二时间点T
4和第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔记为第一时间间隔Δt
1。
The time point at which the terminal device uses the second beam to transmit other data with the network device can be recorded as the second time point T 4 , the second time point T 4 is later than the first time point T 1 , and the second time point T 4 and the first time point T 4 The time interval between time points T 1 is recorded as the first time interval Δt 1 .
当然,终端设备在第二时间点T
4利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据的步骤,可以是根据网络设备预先向终端设备发送的第二控制信息进行的,第二控制信息可以是终端设备在第三时间点T
0接收的,第三时间点T
0可以早于第一时间点T
1,也可以晚于第一时间 点T
1。其中第二控制信息可以用于指示传输其他数据的第二时间点T
4和/或传输其他数据的第二波束,这样,终端设备可以根据第二控制信息在第二时间点T
4利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据。
Of course, the step of the terminal device using the second beam to transmit other data to the network device at the second time point T 4 may be performed according to the second control information that the network device sends to the terminal device in advance, and the second control information may be the terminal device. Received at the third time point T 0 , the third time point T 0 may be earlier than the first time point T 1 , or may be later than the first time point T 1 . The second control information can be used to indicate the second time point T 4 for transmitting other data and/or the second beam for transmitting other data. In this way, the terminal device can use the second time point T 4 at the second time point T 4 according to the second control information. The beam and network equipment transmit other data.
在其他数据为终端设备发送的上行数据时,第二控制信息可以是UL grant,承载于PDCCH,相应的其他数据可以承载于PUSCH,即利用第二波束传输其他数据可以具体为,利用第二波束发送承载其他数据的PUSCH;在其他数据为终端设备接收的下行数据时,第二控制信息可以是DCI,承载于PDCCH,相应的其他数据可以承载于PDSCH,即利用第二波束传输其他数据可以具体为,利用第二波束接收承载其他数据的PDSCH。When the other data is the uplink data sent by the terminal device, the second control information can be UL grant, carried on the PDCCH, and the corresponding other data can be carried on the PUSCH, that is, using the second beam to transmit other data can be specifically, using the second beam Send the PUSCH carrying other data; when the other data is downlink data received by the terminal device, the second control information can be DCI, which is carried on the PDCCH, and the corresponding other data can be carried on the PDSCH, that is, using the second beam to transmit other data can be specific In order to use the second beam to receive the PDSCH carrying other data.
终端设备在第二时间点T
4利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,还可以是根据与网络设备其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,在第二时间点T
4利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据。例如终端设备可以按照一定的周期和预设的第二波束,向网络设备上报其他数据,其在接收第一控制信号后利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据的时间点为第二时间点T
4。
A second terminal apparatus at the time T 4 with the second beam devices with other data transmission network, according to a preset period may be devices with other data network and a preset second beam 4 by the first at a second time point T The two beams transmit other data with the network equipment. For example, the terminal device may report other data to the network device according to a certain period and a preset second beam, and the time point when it uses the second beam to transmit other data to the network device after receiving the first control signal is the second time point T 4 .
需要说明的是,上述的第二时间点T
4可以是一个,也可以是多个,例如在第一时间点T
1之后,在目标时间点T
3之前,终端设备与网络设备之间的可以多次传输不同于目标数据的其他数据,则传输其他数据的多个时间点均为第二时间点T
4。
It should be noted that the above-mentioned second time point T 4 can be one or more than one. For example, after the first time point T 1 and before the target time point T 3 , the communication between the terminal device and the network device can be If other data different from the target data is transmitted multiple times, the multiple time points at which the other data is transmitted are the second time point T 4 .
S103,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,参考图5所示,则终端设备利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。
S103: If the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, referring to FIG. 5, the terminal device uses the first beam Perform target data transmission with network equipment.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以根据第一控制信息确定传输待传输的目标数据的目标时间点T
3,也就是说,第一控制信息指示在目标时间点T
3利用第一波束传输目标数据,其中目标时间点T
3和第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔可以记为第二时间间隔(即time offset),目标时间点T
3和第二时间点T
4之间的时间间隔可以记为第三时间间隔Δt
3。
In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may determine the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data to be transmitted according to the first control information, that is, the first control information indicates that the target time point T 3 is used to transmit the target using the first beam. Data, where the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 can be recorded as the second time interval (ie time offset), the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the second time point T 4 It can be recorded as the third time interval Δt 3 .
在具体实施时,在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的第二时间间隔(即time offset)大于或等于终端设备的预设门限值(threshold)时,终端设备可以在目标时间点T
3利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,这是因为在第一时间点T
1后经过预设门限值(threshold),终端设备才能够解析得到第一波束的信息,并且将终端设备原先使用的其他波束切换为第一波束,此时第一波束才会处于可用的状态。也就是说,目标时间点T
3在门限时间点T
2之后,才可以在目标时间点T
3利用第一波束传输目标数据,其中门限时间点T
2在第一时间点T
1之后,且与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔为预设门限值。
In specific implementation, when the second time interval (ie, time offset) between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold of the terminal device, the terminal device may The target time point T 3 uses the first beam to transmit target data with the network device. This is because after the first time point T 1 passes the preset threshold (threshold), the terminal device can parse the information of the first beam , And switch other beams originally used by the terminal device to the first beam, and then the first beam will be in an available state. That is to say, only after the target time point T 3 is after the threshold time point T 2 can the target data be transmitted by the first beam at the target time point T 3 , where the threshold time point T 2 is after the first time point T 1 and is equal to The time interval between the first time points T 1 is a preset threshold value.
在具体实施时,还需要考虑终端设备在第二时间点T
4使用了第二波束,也就是说,终端设备在解析得到第一波束的信息后,不一定能立刻进行波束的切换,否则会影响第二时间点T
4的其他数据的传输。因此,为了不影响第二时间点T
4第二波束的使用,即使终端设备在第二时间点T
4之前解析得到了第一波束的信息,也不能立即进行波束的切换,而是在第二时间点T
4之后才能开始进行波束的切换,因此需要在第二时间点 T
4之后再经过波束切换所需时长Δt
2,终端设备的第一波束才处于可用状态,波束切换所需时长Δt
2为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需的时长。完成将第二波束切换为第一波束的时间点可以记为可用时间点T
5,第二时间点T
4和可用时间点T
5之间的时间间隔为波束切换所需时长Δt
2,在目标时间点T
3晚于可用时间点T
5时,才可以在目标时间点T
3利用第一波束传输目标数据。
In the specific implementation, it is also necessary to consider that the terminal device uses the second beam at the second time point T 4 , that is, the terminal device may not be able to switch the beam immediately after analyzing and obtaining the information of the first beam, otherwise it will Affect the transmission of other data at the second time point T 4. Therefore, in order not to affect the second point in time T 4 of the second beam is used, even if the terminal device before the second time point T 4 the parsed information of the first beam, the beam can not be switched immediately, but the second The beam switching can only start after the time point T 4 , so the beam switching time length Δt 2 needs to be passed after the second time point T 4 , and the first beam of the terminal device is in the available state, and the beam switching time length Δt 2 The time required to switch the second beam to the first beam. The time point at which the second beam is switched to the first beam can be recorded as the available time point T 5 , the time interval between the second time point T 4 and the available time point T 5 is the time required for beam switching Δt 2 , in the target When the time point T 3 is later than the available time point T 5 , the first beam can be used to transmit the target data at the target time point T 3.
也就是说,目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1的第二时间间隔(time offset)大于或等于终端设备的预设门限值(threshold),且大于或等于第一时间点T
1和第二时间点T
4的第一时间间隔Δt
1与波束切换所需时长Δt
2的和(Δt
1+Δt
2)时,说明第一波束处于可用状态,此时可以利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。换句话说,在目标时间点T
3满足:time offset≥max{threshold,Δt
1+Δt
2}时,终端设备可以利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,此时由于第一波束处于可用状态,利用第一波束传输的目标数据具有更高的可靠性。
That is, the second time offset (time offset) between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold of the terminal device, and greater than or equal to the first time point T 1 When the sum (Δt 1 +Δt 2 ) of the first time interval Δt 1 with the second time point T 4 and the time required for beam switching Δt 2 (Δt 1 +Δt 2 ), it indicates that the first beam is available. At this time, the first beam and the network can be used The equipment transmits the target data. In other words, when the target time point T 3 satisfies: time offset ≥ max {threshold, Δt 1 + Δt 2 }, the terminal device can use the first beam to transmit target data with the network device. At this time, because the first beam is in Available state, the target data transmitted by the first beam has higher reliability.
当然,在第二时间点T
4包括多个时,与第一时间点T
1可以有多个第一时间间隔Δt
1,举例来说,有n个第二时间点T
4,则对应的多个第一时间间隔可以记为Δt
1i,i为小于或等于n的正整数,对于每个i均满足time offset≥max{threshold,Δt
1i+Δt
2}时,可以利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。
Of course, when the second time point T 4 includes multiple, there may be multiple first time intervals Δt 1 with the first time point T 1. For example, if there are n second time points T 4 , there are more The first time interval can be denoted as Δt 1i , i is a positive integer less than or equal to n, and when each i satisfies time offset≥max{threshold, Δt 1i +Δt 2 }, the first beam and network equipment can be used Perform target data transmission.
具体的,若第一波束和第二波束设置于同一天线面板上,将第二波束切换为第一波束可以具体为,将同一天线面板上的第二波束对应的天线切换为第一波束对应的天线,波束切换所需时长Δt
2为天线切换所需的时长。
Specifically, if the first beam and the second beam are arranged on the same antenna panel, switching the second beam to the first beam may be specifically switching the antenna corresponding to the second beam on the same antenna panel to the antenna corresponding to the first beam Antenna, the time required for beam switching Δt 2 is the time required for antenna switching.
具体的,若第一波束和第二波束设置于不同的天线面板上,而终端设备在同一时间一般只使用一个天线面板,其他天线面板可以处于去激活(deactivation)状态,或者激活(activation)但是不能传输数据的状态。Specifically, if the first beam and the second beam are set on different antenna panels, and the terminal device generally uses only one antenna panel at the same time, the other antenna panels can be in a deactivation state or activated but The state where data cannot be transferred.
若第一波束所在的天线面板处于去激活状态,将第二波束切换为第一波束可以具体为,激活第一波束所在的天线面板,将第二波束所在的天线面板切换为第一波束所在的天线面板,并将第二波束对应的天线切换为第一波束对应的天线,波束切换所需时长Δt
2为激活第一波束所在的天线面板所需的时长、天线面板切换所需时长和天线切换所需时长。
If the antenna panel where the first beam is located is in the deactivated state, switching the second beam to the first beam can be specifically as activating the antenna panel where the first beam is located, and switching the antenna panel where the second beam is located to the antenna panel where the first beam is located Antenna panel, and switch the antenna corresponding to the second beam to the antenna corresponding to the first beam. The time required for beam switching Δt 2 is the time required to activate the antenna panel where the first beam is located, the time required for antenna panel switching, and antenna switching The length of time required.
若第一波束所在的天线面板处于激活状态,将第二波束切换为第一波束可以具体为,将第二波束所在的天线面板切换为第一波束所在的天线面板,并将第二波束对应的天线切换为第一波束对应的天线,波束切换所需时长Δt
2包括天线面板切换所需时长和天线切换所需时长。
If the antenna panel where the first beam is located is in the active state, switching the second beam to the first beam can be specifically: switching the antenna panel where the second beam is located to the antenna panel where the first beam is located, and setting the second beam corresponding to the The antenna is switched to the antenna corresponding to the first beam, and the time required for beam switching Δt 2 includes the time required for antenna panel switching and the time required for antenna switching.
由于天线面板还可替换为射频链路或者驱动一个天线面板的多个射频链路或者由一个晶振控制的一个或多个射频链路,因此上述的激活第一波束所在的天线面板可以替换为激活第一波束对应的一个或多个射频链路,将第二波束对应的天线面板切换为第一波束所在的天线面板,也可以替换为将第二波束对应的一个或多个射频链路切换为第一波束对应的一个或多个射频链路,从而通过对射频链路的切换实现第二波束向第一波束的切换。Since the antenna panel can also be replaced with a radio frequency link or multiple radio frequency links that drive an antenna panel, or one or more radio frequency links controlled by a crystal oscillator, the aforementioned antenna panel where the first beam is activated can be replaced by the activation One or more radio frequency links corresponding to the first beam, switch the antenna panel corresponding to the second beam to the antenna panel where the first beam is located, or switch one or more radio frequency links corresponding to the second beam to One or more radio frequency links corresponding to the first beam, so that switching from the second beam to the first beam is realized by switching the radio frequency link.
以上用于确定传输目标数据的预设门限值和波束切换所需时长,是根据终端设备的设备能力状态确定的,终端设备的数据处理能力越强,预设门限值越小,终端设备的波束切换速度越快,波束切换所需时长越短。The preset threshold used to determine the transmission target data and the time required for beam switching are determined according to the device capability status of the terminal device. The stronger the data processing capability of the terminal device, the smaller the preset threshold value, the terminal device The faster the beam switching speed is, the shorter the time required for beam switching.
因此,终端设备可以预先向网络设备发送设备能力状态,以使网络设备根据终端的设备能力状态确定预设门限值以及波束切换所需时长,并根据预设门限值和波束切换所需时长确定与终端设备进行数据传输所利用的波束,例如在终端设备利用第一波束与网络设备进行数据传输时,网络设备可以利用第一波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行数据传输。第一波束可以为终端设备的接收波束,则在终端设备利用第一波束接收网络设备发送的目标数据时,网络设备可以利用第一波束对应的发送波束向终端设备发送目标数据;第一波束可以为终端设备的发送波束,则在终端设备利用第一波束向网络设备发送目标数据时,网络设备利用第一波束对应的接收波束接收终端设备发送的目标数据。Therefore, the terminal device can send the device capability status to the network device in advance, so that the network device determines the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching according to the device capability status of the terminal, and according to the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching Determine the beam used for data transmission with the terminal device. For example, when the terminal device uses the first beam to perform data transmission with the network device, the network device can use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device. The first beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device. When the terminal device uses the first beam to receive target data sent by the network device, the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the first beam to send the target data to the terminal device; the first beam may It is the sending beam of the terminal device, and when the terminal device uses the first beam to send target data to the network device, the network device uses the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
作为一种示例,终端设备向网络设备发送的设备能力状态可以利用预设时长表示,预设时长可以包括{14个符号,28个符号},即一个时隙或两个时隙的时间长度,即预设时长可以为一个时隙或两个时隙,在子载波间隔为120kHz时,一个时隙的时间长度为0.25毫秒。As an example, the device capability status sent by the terminal device to the network device may be represented by a preset duration, and the preset duration may include {14 symbols, 28 symbols}, that is, the time length of one time slot or two time slots, That is, the preset time length can be one time slot or two time slots. When the subcarrier interval is 120 kHz, the time length of one time slot is 0.25 milliseconds.
终端设备还可以根据波束切换所需时长和预设门限值确定预设时长,例如预设时长可以大于波束切换所需时长和预设门限值的和,这样网络终端可以基于预设时长确定预设门限值和波束切换所需时长。The terminal device can also determine the preset duration according to the required duration of beam switching and the preset threshold. For example, the preset duration can be greater than the sum of the required duration of beam switching and the preset threshold, so that the network terminal can determine based on the preset duration Preset the threshold value and the time required for beam switching.
由于天线切换所需时长通常较短,终端设备可以基于激活第一波束所在的天线面板所需的时长与天线面板切换所需时长之和,以及预设门限值确定预设时长;当然,若天线面板切换所需时长也较短,终端设备也可以基于激活第一波束所在的天线面板所需的时长,以及预设门限值确定预设时长。Since the time required for antenna switching is usually relatively short, the terminal device can determine the preset time based on the sum of the time required to activate the antenna panel where the first beam is located and the time required for antenna panel switching, and the preset threshold; of course, if The time required for antenna panel switching is also relatively short, and the terminal device may also determine the preset time based on the time required to activate the antenna panel where the first beam is located and the preset threshold.
S104,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔Δt
1中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,参考图6所示,终端设备利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。
S104: If the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval Δt 1 , and is less than the preset threshold value and the target The larger value in the interval, as shown in FIG. 6, the terminal device uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit target data with the network device.
在具体实施时,在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的第二时间间隔大于或等于终端设备的预设门限值(threshold)时,第一波束在目标时间点T
3处于可用的状态,终端设备可以在目标时间点T
3利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。
In specific implementation, when the second time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the preset threshold of the terminal device, the first beam is at the target time point T 3 In a usable state, the terminal device can use the first beam to transmit target data with the network device at the target time point T 3.
在具体实施时,还需要考虑终端设备在第二时间点T
4使用了第二波束,也就是说,终端设备在解析得到第一波束的信息后,不一定能立刻进行波束的切换,否则会影响第二时间点T
4的其他数据的传输。因此,通常在第二时间点T
4之后才能开始进行波束的切换,因此在目标时间点T
3晚于可用时间点T
5时,第一波束才会在目标时间点T
3处于可用的状态,才可以在目标时间点T
3利用第一波束传输目标数据。而在目标时间点T
3早于可用时间点T
5时,说明并未完成第二波束向第一波束的切换,第一波束处于不可用状态,此时不能使用第一波束进行目标数据的传输,因此容易导致目标数据的丢失。而在晚于第二时间点T
4且早于可用时间点T
5的时间段内,第二波束处于可用状 态,因此,可以使用第二波束或第三波束进行目标数据的传输,第三波束为第二波束对应的传输波束,在第二波束为发送波束时,第三波束为与第二波束对应的接收波束,在第二波束为接收波束时,第三波束为与第二波束对应的发送波束,在第二波束处于可用状态时,第三波束也处于可用状态,从而避免使用错误的波束导致目标数据的丢失。
In the specific implementation, it is also necessary to consider that the terminal device uses the second beam at the second time point T 4 , that is, the terminal device may not be able to switch the beam immediately after analyzing and obtaining the information of the first beam, otherwise it will Affect the transmission of other data at the second time point T 4. Therefore, usually before starting handover beam after the second time point T 4, and therefore the target point T 3 time points later than the time available T 5, the first beam will be at a point in time T 3 is in a usable state, Only then can the first beam be used to transmit the target data at the target time point T 3. When the target time point T 3 is earlier than the available time point T 5 , it means that the switch from the second beam to the first beam has not been completed, and the first beam is in an unavailable state. At this time, the first beam cannot be used for target data transmission. , So it is easy to cause the loss of target data. In a time period later than the second time point T 4 and earlier than the available time point T 5 , the second beam is in the available state. Therefore, the second beam or the third beam can be used for target data transmission, and the third beam Is the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. When the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam; when the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is corresponding to the second beam The transmitting beam, when the second beam is in the available state, the third beam is also in the available state, so as to avoid using the wrong beam to cause the loss of target data.
也就是说,目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1的第二时间间隔(time offset)小于预设门限值或小于目标间隔,即小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,第一波束处于不可用的状态,此时将不再利用第一波束进行目标数据的传输,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1的第二时间间隔(time offset)在满足小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值的前提下,同时满足大于或等于预设门限值,或同时满足大于或等于第一时间间隔Δt
1,即第二时间间隔(time offset)在小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,同时大于预设门限值和第一时间间隔Δt
1中的较小值时,终端设备可以利用第二波束或第三波束进行目标设备的传输。
In other words, the second time interval (time offset) between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is smaller than the preset threshold value or smaller than the target interval, that is, smaller than the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval. Value, the first beam is in an unusable state. At this time, the first beam will no longer be used to transmit target data. If the second time offset (time offset) between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is Under the premise of meeting the larger value of less than the preset threshold value and the target interval, and meeting greater than or equal to the preset threshold value at the same time, or at the same time meeting greater than or equal to the first time interval Δt 1 , that is, the second time interval (time offset) when it is less than the larger value of the preset threshold value and the target interval, and is greater than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval Δt 1 , the terminal device can use the second beam or the third beam Transfer to the target device.
换句话说,在目标时间点T
3满足:time offset﹤max{threshold,Δt
1+Δt
2},且time offset≥min{threshold,Δt
1}时,终端设备可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,此时第二波束或第三波束处于可用状态,利用第二波束传输的目标数据具有更高的可靠性。当然,在第二时间点T
4包括多个时,与第一时间点T
1可以有多个第一时间间隔Δt
1,举例来说,有n个第二时间点T
4,则多个第一时间间隔可以记为Δt
1i,i为小于或等于n的正整数,对于每个i都满足time offset﹤max{threshold,Δt
1i+Δt
2}且time offset≥min{threshold,Δt
1i}时,可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。
In other words, when the target time point T 3 satisfies: time offset <max{threshold, Δt 1 + Δt 2 }, and time offset ≥ min{threshold, Δt 1 }, the terminal device can use the second beam or the third beam The target data is transmitted with the network device. At this time, the second beam or the third beam is in an available state, and the target data transmitted by the second beam has higher reliability. Of course, at the second time point T 4 includes a plurality, and the first time T 1 may have a plurality of the first time interval Δt 1, for example, there are n second time point T 4, the plurality of A time interval can be denoted as Δt 1i , i is a positive integer less than or equal to n, and when each i satisfies time offset﹤max{threshold, Δt 1i + Δt 2 } and time offset≥min{threshold, Δt 1i } , You can use the second beam or the third beam to transmit target data with the network device.
再换句话说,目标时间点T
3在门限时间点T
2和可用时间点T
5之间,或在第二时间点T
4和可用时间点T
5之间,或在第二时间点T
4和门限时间点T
2之间,则可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。具体的,若门限时间点T
2在第二时间点T
4之前,则目标时间点在门限时间点T
2之后且在可用时间点T
5之前,可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,参考图6所示;若门限时间点T
2在第二时间点T
4之后,在可用时间点T
5之前,则目标时间点在第二时间点T
4之后且在可用时间点T
5之前(图未示出),可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输;若门限时间点T
2在可用时间点T
5之后,则目标时间点T
3在第二时间点T
4之后且在门限时间点T
2之前(图未示出),可以利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。
In other words, the target time point T 3 is between the threshold time point T 2 and the available time point T 5 , or between the second time point T 4 and the available time point T 5 , or at the second time point T 4 Between the threshold time point T 2 and the threshold time point T 2, the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit the target data with the network device. Specifically, if the threshold time point T 2 is before the second time point T 4 , and the target time point is after the threshold time point T 2 and before the available time point T 5 , the second beam or the third beam can be used with the network device Perform target data transmission, as shown in Figure 6; if the threshold time point T 2 is after the second time point T 4 and before the available time point T 5 , then the target time point is after the second time point T 4 and is available Before the time point T 5 (not shown in the figure), the second beam or the third beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device; if the threshold time point T 2 is after the available time point T 5 , the target time point T 3 After the second time point T 4 and before the threshold time point T 2 (not shown in the figure), the second beam or the third beam may be used to transmit target data with the network device.
在终端设备利用第二波束或第三波束与网络设备进行数据传输时,网络设备可以利用第二波束或第三波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行数据传输。例如第二波束可以为终端设备的接收波束,则在终端设备利用第二波束接收网络设备发送的目标数据时,网络设备可以利用第二波束对应的发送波束向终端设备发送目标数据;或者在终端设备利用第三波束向网络设备发送目标数据时,网络设备可以利用第三波束对应的接收波束接收终端设备发送的目标数据。When the terminal device uses the second beam or the third beam to perform data transmission with the network device, the network device may use the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam or the third beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device. For example, the second beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device. When the terminal device uses the second beam to receive target data sent by the network device, the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the second beam to send the target data to the terminal device; or When the device uses the third beam to send target data to the network device, the network device may use the receiving beam corresponding to the third beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
S105,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和第一时间间隔Δt
1中的较小值,参考图7所示,则终端设备利用预设波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输。
S105: If the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval Δt 1 , as shown in FIG. 7, the terminal device uses the preset Set the beam and the network equipment to transmit the target data.
在具体实施时,若目标时间点T
3早于门限时间点T
2,即目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的第二时间间隔(time offset)小于终端设备的预设门限值(threshold),终端设备可能未对第一控制消息进行解析或者未完成其他波束向第一波束的切换,因此不能利用第一波束进行目标数据的传输。
In specific implementation, if the target time point T 3 is earlier than the threshold time point T 2 , that is, the second time offset (time offset) between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the preset gate of the terminal device. Threshold, the terminal device may not parse the first control message or complete the switching of other beams to the first beam, so the first beam cannot be used to transmit target data.
在具体实施时,若目标时间点T
3早于第二时间点T
4,即目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的第二时间间隔小于第一时间间隔Δt
1时,不能利用第二波束进行目标数据的传输,当然也不能利用第一波束进行目标数据的传输。
In specific implementation, if the target time point T 3 is earlier than the second time point T 4 , that is, when the second time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the first time interval Δt 1 , it cannot The second beam is used to transmit target data, but of course the first beam cannot be used to transmit target data.
因此,在目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的第二时间间隔小于终端设备的预设门限值(threshold),且小于第一时间间隔Δt
1时,参考图7所示,不确定终端设备当前使用的波束是否为第二波束,因此可以利用预设波束进行目标数据的传输。换句话说,在目标时间点T
3满足:time offset﹤min{threshold,Δt
1}时,可以利用预设波束进行目标数据的传输。当然,在第二时间点T
4包括多个时,与第一时间点T
1之间可以有多个第一时间间隔Δt
1,举例来说,有n个第二时间点T
4,则多个第一时间间隔可以记为Δt
1i,i为小于或等于n的正整数,对于每个i均满足time offset﹤min{threshold,Δt
1i}时,可以利用预设波束进行目标数据的传输。
Therefore, when the second time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the preset threshold of the terminal device and less than the first time interval Δt 1 , refer to FIG. 7 , It is uncertain whether the beam currently used by the terminal device is the second beam, so the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data. In other words, when the target time point T 3 satisfies: time offset <min{threshold, Δt 1 }, the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data. Of course, when the second time point T 4 includes multiple, there may be multiple first time intervals Δt 1 between the first time point T 1 and the first time point T 1, for example, if there are n second time points T 4 , then more The first time interval can be recorded as Δt 1i , i is a positive integer less than or equal to n, and when each i satisfies the time offset <min{threshold, Δt 1i }, the preset beam can be used to transmit the target data.
这是因为,在未对第一控制信息进行解析得到目标时间点T
3时,可以利用预设波束进行数据的缓存,缓存的数据可以包括目标数据,预设波束例如可以是CORESET ID最低的PDCCH接收波束。
This is because, without analyzing the first control information to obtain the target cache point when time T 3, the beam may be utilized for preset data, cached data may comprise target data, for example, the beam may be preset lowest PDCCH CORESET ID Receive beam.
在终端设备利用预设波束与网络设备进行数据传输时,网络设备可以利用预设波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行数据传输。例如预设波束可以为终端设备的接收波束,则在终端设备利用预设波束接收网络设备发送的目标数据时,网络设备可以利用预设波束对应的发送波束向终端设备发送目标数据;预设波束可以为终端设备的发送波束,则在终端设备利用预设波束向网络设备发送目标数据时,网络设备利用预设波束对应的接收波束接收终端设备发送的目标数据。When the terminal device uses the preset beam to perform data transmission with the network device, the network device may use the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device. For example, the preset beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device. When the terminal device uses the preset beam to receive target data sent by the network device, the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the preset beam to send the target data to the terminal device; the preset beam It may be the transmitting beam of the terminal device. When the terminal device uses the preset beam to send target data to the network device, the network device uses the receiving beam corresponding to the preset beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
上述S103、S104和S105是对应三种情况的步骤,在满足其中之一的执行条件时执行该步骤,即可实现目标数据的传输。The above S103, S104, and S105 are steps corresponding to the three situations, and this step is executed when one of the execution conditions is met, and the target data transmission can be realized.
下面结合具体场景,对上述步骤进行举例说明。The above steps will be described with examples in combination with specific scenarios.
终端设备在第一时间点T
1之前,可以在第三时间点T
0接收第二控制信息,第二控制信息为下行控制信息,从而确定在第二时间点T
4进行其他数据的上传。而在第一时间点T
1之前,网络设备还可以对终端设备进行RRC配置,从而向终端设备通知一些高层信令参数,举例来说,RRC配置可以为CellGroupConfig→…→ServingCellConfig→…→BWP→…→PDSCH-Config→…→tci-StatesToAddModList,其中tci-StatesToAddModlist里面的一个示例的TCI state#1::{qcl-TypeD:CSI-RS#1}。
Before the first time point T 1 , the terminal device may receive second control information at a third time point T 0 , where the second control information is downlink control information, so as to determine to upload other data at the second time point T 4. And before the first point in time T 1, the network device may also be the terminal device RRC configuration, a number of higher layer signaling to notify the terminal device parameters, for example, RRC configuration may CellGroupConfig → ... → ServingCellConfig → ... → BWP → …→PDSCH-Config→…→tci-StatesToAddModList, an example of TCI state#1::{qcl-TypeD:CSI-RS#1} in tci-StatesToAddModlist.
终端设备在第一时间点T
1接收第一控制信息,第一控制信息为下行控制信息,从而确 定在目标时间点T
3进行目标数据的接收。举例来说,网络设备通过DCI format 1_1调度在n_{PDSCH}时间点(目标时间点的示例性表达)开始有PDSCH传输,并通过在TCI字段填写000指示终端应该使用TCI#1对应的接收波束来接收该PDSCH。
Terminal device receives first control information at a first time point T 1, the first downlink control information as the control information, thereby determining reception target data at the target time point T 3. For example, the network device schedules PDSCH transmission at n_{PDSCH} time point (an exemplary expression of the target time point) through DCI format 1_1, and fills in 000 in the TCI field to indicate that the terminal should use the receiving beam corresponding to TCI#1 To receive the PDSCH.
终端设备在第二时间点T
4进行其他数据的上传。
A second terminal apparatus at the time point T 4 other data upload.
终端设备在第一时间点T
1之后先利用预设波束进行数据缓存;在time offset﹤min{threshold,Δt
1}时,利用预设波束接收目标数据;在time offset﹤max{threshold,Δt
1+Δt
2},且time offset≥min{threshold,Δt
1}时,利用第二波束接收目标数据;在time offset≥max{threshold,Δt
1+Δt
2}时,利用第一波束接收目标数据。
The terminal device first uses the preset beam for data buffering after the first time point T 1 ; when time offset <min{threshold, Δt 1 }, uses the preset beam to receive target data; at time offset ﹤max{threshold, Δt 1 +Δt 2 } and time offset≥min{threshold, Δt 1 }, use the second beam to receive the target data; when time offset≥max{threshold, Δt 1 +Δt 2 }, use the first beam to receive the target data.
本申请实施例提供了一种传输数据的方法,在第一时间点接收来自网络设备的第一控制信息,第一控制信息可以指示待传输的目标数据、传输目标数据的目标时间点以及传输目标数据所利用的第一波束,若在晚于第一时间点的第二时间点利用了第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据,则可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,第一时间间隔为第一时间点和第二时间点之间的时间间隔,波束切换所需时长为将第二波束切换为第一波束所需时长。The embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting data, receiving first control information from a network device at a first point in time. The first control information may indicate the target data to be transmitted, the target time point of the target data transmission, and the transmission target. The first beam used by the data, if the second beam is used to transmit other data to the network device at a second time point later than the first time point, the time interval between the target time point and the first time point may be greater than Or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used to transmit target data. The target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching. The first time interval It is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
也就是说,本申请实施例中,可以同时考虑预设门限值、利用第二波束的第二时间点以及波束切换所需时长,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,且目标时间点是在第二时间点之后经过了波束切换所需时长的时间点的情况下,利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,这样即使在第二时间点利用了第二波束,也能够在第二时间点之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,因此减少了因第一波束不可用导致目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the preset threshold value, the second time point of using the second beam, and the time required for beam switching can be considered at the same time. The time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than Or equal to the preset threshold, and the target time point is the time point after the second time point that the time required for beam switching has elapsed, the first beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device, so that even at the first time point The second beam is used at the second time point, and there is enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point. There will be no unavailability of the first beam, thus reducing the Unavailability may cause the target data transmission to fail, and improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
下面从网络设备的角度对本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输方法进行说明,参考图8所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种数据传输方法的流程图,该方法应用于网络设备,可以包括以下步骤:The following describes a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application from the perspective of a network device. Referring to FIG. 8, a flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application is applied to the network device. It can include the following steps:
S201,网络设备在第一时间点T
1向终端设备发送第一控制信息。
S201, the network device 1 transmits the first control information to the terminal device at a first time point T.
终端设备和网络设备之间待传输的数据可以作为目标数据,目标数据可以是网络设备向终端设备发送的数据,也可以是终端设备向网络设备发送的数据。也就是说,对于网络设备来说,目标数据可以是发送的下行数据,也可以是接收的上行数据。The data to be transmitted between the terminal device and the network device can be used as target data. The target data can be data sent by the network device to the terminal device or data sent by the terminal device to the network device. In other words, for the network device, the target data can be sent downlink data or received uplink data.
第一控制信息可以指示传输目标数据的相关参数。第一控制信息可以指示待传输的目标数据、传输目标数据的目标时间点T
3以及传输目标数据的第一波束的至少一个。第一控制信息以及第一控制信息指示的传输目标数据的相关参数,可以参考S101中的说明。
The first control information may indicate related parameters of the transmission target data. The first control information may indicate at least one of the target data to be transmitted, the target time point T 3 for transmitting the target data, and the first beam for transmitting the target data. For the first control information and the related parameters of the transmission target data indicated by the first control information, reference may be made to the description in S101.
S202,网络设备在第二时间点T
4与使用第二波束的终端设备进行其它数据的传输。
S202, the network device other data transmission at a second time point T 4 and the second beam using the terminal.
网络设备在向终端设备发送第一控制信息后,与终端设备还可以有传输其他数据的需求,其他数据是不同于目标数据的数据,可以是网络设备接收的其他上行数据,也可以是网络设备发送的其他下行数据。终端设备利用第二波束与网络设备进行其他数据的传输, 相应的网络设备利用与第二波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行其他数据的传输。本申请实施例中,传输其他数据所利用的波束可以是不同于第一波束的第二波束,第一波束和第二波束可以设置于同一天线面板上,也可以设置于不同天线面板上。After the network device sends the first control information to the terminal device, it may also need to transmit other data with the terminal device. The other data is data that is different from the target data, and it can be other uplink data received by the network device, or it can be the network device. Other downstream data sent. The terminal device uses the second beam to transmit other data with the network device, and the corresponding network device uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to transmit other data with the terminal device. In the embodiments of the present application, the beam used to transmit other data may be a second beam different from the first beam. The first beam and the second beam may be set on the same antenna panel or on different antenna panels.
当然,网络设备在第二时间点T
4与使用第二波束的终端设备传输其他数据的步骤,可以是根据网络设备预先向终端设备发送的第二控制信息进行的,第二控制信息可以是终端设备在第三时间点T
0接收的,第三时间点T
0可以早于第一时间点T
1,也可以晚于第一时间点T
1。其中第二控制信息可以用于指示传输其他数据的第二时间点T
4和/或传输其他数据的第二波束,这样,终端设备可以根据第二控制信息在第二时间点T
4利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据。
Of course, the step of the network device transmitting other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point T 4 may be performed according to the second control information that the network device sends to the terminal device in advance, and the second control information may be the terminal device. Received by the device at the third time point T 0 , the third time point T 0 may be earlier than the first time point T 1 , or may be later than the first time point T 1 . The second control information can be used to indicate the second time point T 4 for transmitting other data and/or the second beam for transmitting other data. In this way, the terminal device can use the second time point T 4 at the second time point T 4 according to the second control information. The beam and network equipment transmit other data.
网络设备在第二时间点T
4与使用第二波束的终端设备传输其他数据的步骤,还可以是根据与终端设备对其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,在第二时间点T
4利用第二波束与终端设备传输其他数据。例如终端设备可以按照一定的周期和预设的第二波束,向网络设备上报其他数据,其在接收第一控制信号后利用第二波束与网络设备传输其他数据的时间点为第二时间点T
4。
The step of transmitting other data between the network device and the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point T 4 may also be based on the preset period and the preset second beam with the terminal device for other data, at the second time point T 4 uses the second beam to transmit other data with the terminal device. For example, the terminal device may report other data to the network device according to a certain period and a preset second beam, and the time point when it uses the second beam to transmit other data to the network device after receiving the first control signal is the second time point T 4 .
S203,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,参考图5所示,则网络设备利用第一波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行目标数据的传输。
S203: If the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, referring to FIG. 5, the network device uses the first beam The corresponding transmission beam transmits the target data with the terminal device.
具体的,网络设备利用第一波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行目标数据的传输,与终端设备利用第一波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输是同步的,因此关于时间点的具体说明可以参考S103。Specifically, the network device uses the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam to transmit target data to the terminal device, and it is synchronized with the terminal device to use the first beam to transmit target data to the network device. Therefore, the specific description about the time point can be referred to S103.
终端设备可以预先向网络设备发送设备能力状态,以使网络设备根据终端的设备能力状态确定预设门限值以及波束切换所需时长,网络设备根据预设门限值和波束切换所需时长确定与终端设备进行数据传输所利用的波束,例如在终端设备利用第一波束与网络设备进行数据传输时,网络设备可以利用第一波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行数据传输。第一波束可以为终端设备的接收波束,则在终端设备利用第一波束接收网络设备发送的目标数据时,网络设备可以利用第一波束对应的发送波束向终端设备发送目标数据;第一波束可以为终端设备的发送波束,则在终端设备利用第一波束向网络设备发送目标数据时,网络设备利用第一波束对应的接收波束接收终端设备发送的目标数据。The terminal device can send the device capability status to the network device in advance, so that the network device determines the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching according to the device capability status of the terminal, and the network device determines the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching The beam used for data transmission with the terminal device. For example, when the terminal device uses the first beam to perform data transmission with the network device, the network device can use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device. The first beam may be the receiving beam of the terminal device. When the terminal device uses the first beam to receive target data sent by the network device, the network device may use the sending beam corresponding to the first beam to send the target data to the terminal device; the first beam may It is the sending beam of the terminal device, and when the terminal device uses the first beam to send target data to the network device, the network device uses the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam to receive the target data sent by the terminal device.
S204,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔Δt
1中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,参考图6所示,网络设备利用第二波束对应的传输波束或第三波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行目标数据的传输。
S204: If the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval Δt 1 , and is smaller than the preset threshold value and the target For the larger value in the interval, referring to FIG. 6, the network device uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam or the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam to transmit target data with the terminal device.
S205,若目标时间点T
3与第一时间点T
1之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和第一时间间隔Δt
1中的较小值,参考图7所示,则网络设备利用预设波束对应的传输波束与终端设备进行目标数据的传输。
S205: If the time interval between the target time point T 3 and the first time point T 1 is less than the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval Δt 1 , as shown in FIG. 7, the network device uses the preset It is assumed that the transmission beam corresponding to the beam transmits the target data with the terminal device.
S204和S205可以参考S104和S105的说明,在此不做赘述。S204 and S205 can refer to the description of S104 and S105, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,在目标时间点与第二时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值时,说明终端设备在接收第一控制信息后有足够的时间去切换第一波束,在目标时间点是在第二时间点之后经过了波束切换所需时长的时间点时,说明终端设备在利用第二波束传输其他数据后有足够的时间去切换第一波束,因此目标时间点同时满足以上两个条件时,说明终端设备的第一波束处于可用状态,则可以利用第一波束对应的传输波束与使用第一波束的终端设备进行目标数据的传输。例如第一波束为发送波束,则可以利用第一波束对应的接收波束接收目标数据,若第一波束为接收波束,则可以利用第一波束对应的发送波束发送目标数据。In the embodiment of the present application, when the time interval between the target time point and the second time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it indicates that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after receiving the first control information , When the target time point is after the second time point and the time required for beam switching has elapsed, it means that the terminal device has enough time to switch the first beam after using the second beam to transmit other data. Therefore, the target time point When the above two conditions are met at the same time, indicating that the first beam of the terminal device is in an available state, the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam can be used to transmit target data. For example, if the first beam is a transmitting beam, the receiving beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to receive the target data. If the first beam is a receiving beam, the transmitting beam corresponding to the first beam may be used to transmit the target data.
这样即使在第二时间点与使用第二波束的终端设备进行了其它数据的传输,终端设备也能够在第二时间点之后有足够的时间去将第二波束切换为第一波束,不会存在第一波束不可用的情况,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。In this way, even if other data is transmitted with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point, the terminal device can have enough time to switch the second beam to the first beam after the second time point, and there will be no The unavailability of the first beam reduces the possibility of target data transmission failure caused by the unavailability of the first beam, and improves the reliability of target data transmission.
本申请实施例中,在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔不满足大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值的条件时,即目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,说明在到达目标时间点之前并不一定有足够的时间去切换第一波束,可能存在第一波束不可用导致的目标数据的传输失败的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, when the time interval between the target time point and the first time point does not meet the condition of being greater than or equal to the preset threshold value and the larger value of the target interval, that is, the target time point and the first time point When the time interval between points is less than the larger value of the preset threshold and the target interval, it means that there may not be enough time to switch the first beam before reaching the target time point, and the first beam may be unavailable. The transmission of the target data failed.
因此,本申请实施例中,可以判断目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔是否大于或等于预设门限值,是否大于或等于第一时间间隔,以及是否大于或等于目标间隔,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值,说明有足够的时间获取到传输目标数据的相关信息,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于第一时间间隔,说明目标时间点在第二时间点之后,第二波束处于可用状态,因此在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值时,可以利用第二波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,减少了因第一波束不可用导致的目标数据传输失败的可能,提高目标数据传输的可靠性。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, it can be determined whether the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, whether greater than or equal to the first time interval, and whether greater than or equal to the target interval, If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, it means that there is enough time to obtain the relevant information of the transmission target data. If the time between the target time point and the first time point is The interval is greater than or equal to the first time interval, indicating that the target time point is after the second time point, and the second beam is in the available state, so the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the preset threshold When the smaller value in the first time interval is smaller than the preset threshold value and the larger value in the target interval, the second beam can be used to transmit target data with the network device, reducing the unavailability of the first beam. The result is the possibility of target data transmission failure, and the reliability of target data transmission is improved.
在本申请实施例中,若目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值,说明关于传输目标数据的信息并未完全被解析或者没有足够的时间完成向第一波束的切换,而在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于第一时间间隔,说明此时还没到利用第二波束的时间,第二波束不一定可用,因此可以在目标时间点与第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于预设门限值且小于第一时间间隔时,利用预设波束与网络设备进行目标数据的传输,提高目标数据的传输的可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, if the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the preset threshold, it means that the information about the transmission target data has not been completely analyzed or there is insufficient time to complete the transmission to the first beam. Switch, and the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the first time interval, indicating that the time to use the second beam is not yet available at this time, so the second beam may not be available at the target time point When the time interval from the first time point is less than the preset threshold and less than the first time interval, the preset beam is used to transmit the target data with the network device to improve the reliability of the target data transmission.
本文中描述的各个实施例可以为独立的方案,也可以根据内在逻辑进行组合,这些方案都落入本申请的保护范围中。The various embodiments described herein may be independent solutions, or may be combined according to internal logic, and these solutions fall within the protection scope of the present application.
可以理解的是,上述各个方法实施例中,由终端设备实现的方法和操作,也可以由可用于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现,由网络设备实现的方法和操作,也可以 由可用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。It can be understood that, in the foregoing method embodiments, the methods and operations implemented by the terminal device can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the terminal device, and the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by It can be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) of network devices.
上述主要从各个交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如发射端设备或者接收端设备,为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of each interaction. It can be understood that each network element, such as a transmitting end device or a receiving end device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function in order to realize the above-mentioned functions. Those skilled in the art should be aware that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, this application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对发射端设备或者接收端设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以使用硬件的形式实现,也可以使用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以使用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。The embodiments of the present application can divide the transmitting end device or the receiving end device into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. in. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of dividing each function module corresponding to each function.
以上,结合图4至图8详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下,结合图9至图10详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信设备。应理解,装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应,因此,未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Above, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 to 8. Hereinafter, the communication device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 10. It should be understood that the description of the device embodiment and the description of the method embodiment correspond to each other. Therefore, for the content that is not described in detail, please refer to the above method embodiment. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
图9是本申请实施例提供的通信设备的示意性框图。如图所示,该通信设备可以包括通信单元110,可选地,还可以包括处理单元120。通信单元110可以与外部进行通信,处理单元120用于进行处理,如确定波束、确定发送数据的时间等。通信单元110还可以称为通信接口或收发单元。该通信设备可以用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备所执行的动作,或者,该通信设备可以用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备所执行的动作。FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, the communication device may include a communication unit 110, and optionally, may also include a processing unit 120. The communication unit 110 may communicate with the outside, and the processing unit 120 is used for processing, such as determining a beam, determining a time to send data, and so on. The communication unit 110 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a transceiving unit. The communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment, or the communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
例如:通信单元也可以称为收发单元,包括发送单元和/或接收单元,分别用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备或终端设备发送和接收的步骤。For example, the communication unit may also be called a transceiving unit, and includes a sending unit and/or a receiving unit, which are respectively used to perform the steps of sending and receiving by the network device or the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信设备可实现对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备执行的步骤或者流程,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的芯片或电路。通信单元用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备侧的收发相关操作,处理单元120用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备的处理相关操作。In a possible design, the communication device may implement the steps or processes performed by the terminal device corresponding to the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit configured in the terminal device. The communication unit is used to perform the transceiving-related operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment, and the processing unit 120 is used to perform the processing related operations on the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
一种可能的实现方式,通信单元110,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 110 is configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit the target data at the target time point and/or the transmission location. The first beam of the target data; use the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元120,用于:The processing unit 120 is used for:
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的 时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长;If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses The first beam and the network device transmit the target data; wherein, the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the first time A time interval between a point and the second time point, the time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam;
和/或,and / or,
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束;If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold Value and the larger value of the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, and the The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a reception beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is When receiving a beam, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam;
和/或,and / or,
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
可选地,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。Optionally, the time required for beam switching includes at least: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
可选地,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。Optionally, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam is the receiving station The receiving beam used by the first control information or the sending beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
可选地,所述处理单元还用于:根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;Optionally, the processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and a preset second beam, so that the communication unit is in the Using the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at a second time point;
或,所述通信单元还用于:接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示待传输的所述其他数据、传输所述其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;则,Or, the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,
所述处理单元还用于:根据所述第二控制信息,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。The processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
可选地,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述通信单元还用于:Optionally, the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching are determined based on the device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:
在所述第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Before receiving the first control information from the network device at the first time point, send the device capability status to the network device.
可选地,所述网络设备包括基站、中继站或接入点。Optionally, the network equipment includes a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
该通信设备可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法中的终端设备执行的步骤或者流程,该通信设备可以包括用于执行图4中的方法中的终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信设备中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图4中的方法的相应流程。The communication device may implement the steps or processes executed by the terminal device in the method corresponding to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method in FIG. 4. In addition, each unit in the communication device and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method in FIG. 4.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信设备中的通信单元110可通过终端设备中的收发器实现,该通信设备中的处理单元120可通过终端设备中的处理器实现。It should also be understood that the communication unit 110 in the communication device may be implemented by a transceiver in the terminal device, and the processing unit 120 in the communication device may be implemented by a processor in the terminal device.
还应理解,该通信设备中的通信单元110也可以为输入/输出接口。It should also be understood that the communication unit 110 in the communication device may also be an input/output interface.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信设备可实现对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备执行的步骤或者流程,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的芯片或电路。通信单元110用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的收发相关操作,处理单元120用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备的处理相关操作。In another possible design, the communication device may implement steps or processes corresponding to the network device in the above method embodiment. For example, it may be a network device, or a chip or circuit configured in the network device. The communication unit 110 is used to perform the transceiving related operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment, and the processing unit 120 is used to perform the processing related operations on the network device in the above method embodiment.
一种可能的实现方式,通信单元110,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 110 is configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit the target data at the target time point and/or the transmission location. The first beam of the target data; use the second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;
处理单元120,用于若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用第一波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第一波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与终端设备的波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为所述终端设备将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长;The processing unit 120 is configured to trigger the communication unit to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value and the target interval. Make the communication unit use the transmission beam corresponding to the first beam and the terminal device using the first beam to transmit the target data; wherein the target interval is the beam switching between the first time interval and the terminal device The sum of the required time lengths, the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching is the time required for the terminal device to switch the second beam The time required for switching to the first beam;
和/或,and / or,
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用第二波束对应的传输波束与使用所述第二波束的所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,或利用所述第三波束对应的传输波束与时使用所述第三波束的所述终端设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束;If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold Value and the larger value of the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the second beam to perform the target data with the network device using the second beam Or use the transmission beam corresponding to the third beam and the terminal device that uses the third beam to transmit the target data, where the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam, If the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same as the first beam. The transmission beam corresponding to the two beams;
和/或,and / or,
若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束对应的传输波束与使用所述预设波束的所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses the transmission beam corresponding to the preset beam and the network device using the preset beam to transmit the target data.
可选地,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为发送所述第一控制信息所利用的发送波束或所述发送波束对应的接收波束。Optionally, the information of the first beam is configured in the first control information; or, the information of the first beam is not configured in the first control information, then the first beam is the transmitting station The transmitting beam used by the first control information or the receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam.
可选地,所述通信单元还用于:根据与所述终端设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点与使用所述第二波束的所述终端设备传输所述其他数据;Optionally, the communication unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to a preset period for transmitting the other data with the terminal device and a preset second beam, so that the communication unit is in the Transmitting the other data at a second time point with the terminal device using the second beam;
或,所述通信单元还用于:向所述终端设备发送第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Or, the communication unit is further configured to: send second control information to the terminal device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the first time point for transmitting the other data Two beams;
则所述处理单元还用于:触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在第二时间点与使用第二波束的所述终端设备传输其他数据。Then the processing unit is further configured to trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit transmits other data with the terminal device using the second beam at the second time point.
可选地,所述通信单元还用于:Optionally, the communication unit is further used for:
接收来自所述终端设备的设备能力状态,基于所述设备能力状态确定所述预设门限值以及所述波束切换所需时长。Receiving the device capability state from the terminal device, and determining the preset threshold value and the time required for beam switching based on the device capability state.
该通信设备可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法中的网络设备执行的步骤或者流程,该通信设备可以包括用于执行图8中的方法中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信设备中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图8中的方法的相应流程。The communication device may implement the steps or processes executed by the network device in the method corresponding to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method in FIG. 8. In addition, each unit in the communication device and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding flow of the method in FIG. 8.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
该通信设备可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法中的网络设备执行的步骤或者流程,该通信设备可以包括用于执行图8中的方法中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信设备中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图8中的方法的相应流程。The communication device may implement the steps or processes executed by the network device in the method corresponding to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method in FIG. 8. In addition, each unit in the communication device and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding flow of the method in FIG. 8.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信设备中的通信单元110为可通过网络设备中的收发器实现,该通信设备中的处理单元120可通过网络设备中的处理器实现。收发器可以包括发射器和/或接收器,分别实现发送单元和接收单元的功能。It should also be understood that the communication unit 110 in the communication device may be implemented by a transceiver in the network device, and the processing unit 120 in the communication device may be implemented by a processor in the network device. The transceiver may include a transmitter and/or a receiver, which respectively implement the functions of the transmitting unit and the receiving unit.
还应理解,该通信设备中的通信单元110也可以为输入/输出接口。It should also be understood that the communication unit 110 in the communication device may also be an input/output interface.
以下结合图10举例进行说明。图10是本申请实施例提供的通信设备2000的结构示意图,该通信设备可以为终端设备。该终端设备可应用于如图3所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能,或者实现上述方法实施例中终端设备执行的步骤或者流程。The following description will be given with reference to FIG. 10 as an example. FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device may be a terminal device. The terminal device can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 3 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, or implement the steps or processes performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
如图10所示,该终端设备包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地,该终端设备还包括存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2002和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地,终端设备还可以包括天线,用于将收发器2020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。As shown in FIG. 10, the terminal device includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020. Optionally, the terminal device further includes a memory 2030. Among them, the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device may also include an antenna for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中,或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图9中的处理单元对应。The above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions. During specific implementation, the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010. The processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 9.
上述收发器2020可以与图9中的通信单元对应,也可以称为收发单元。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The above transceiver 2020 may correspond to the communication unit in FIG. 9 and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit. The transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图10所示的终端设备能够实现图4所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。 具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。It should be understood that the terminal device shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4. The operation and/or function of each module in the terminal device is to implement the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the above method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器2020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备还可以包括电源2050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the foregoing terminal device may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备还可以包括输入单元、显示单元、音频电路、摄像头和传感器等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器、麦克风等。In addition, in order to make the function of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device may also include one or more of an input unit, a display unit, an audio circuit, a camera, and a sensor. The audio circuit may also include a speaker and a microphone. Wait.
图10中的通信设备2000还可以是网络设备,例如可以为基站。该基站可应用于如3所示的系统中,实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能,或者实现上述方法实施例中网络设备执行的步骤或者流程。The communication device 2000 in FIG. 10 may also be a network device, for example, a base station. The base station can be applied to the system shown in 3 to realize the function of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, or to implement the steps or processes performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
该基站可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元,digital unit,DU)。所述RRU可以作为收发器2020,与图9中的通信单元110对应。可选地,该收发器2020还可以称为收发机、收发电路、收发单元等等,其可以包括至少一个天线和射频单元。可选地,收发器2020可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU与BBU可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。The base station may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DU). The RRU may be used as the transceiver 2020 and corresponds to the communication unit 110 in FIG. 9. Optionally, the transceiver 2020 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a transceiver unit, etc., and it may include at least one antenna and a radio frequency unit. Optionally, the transceiver 2020 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit. The receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver or receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit). The RRU part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment. The BBU part is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on. The RRU and BBU may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU为基站的控制中心,可以作为处理单元,可以与图9中的处理单元120对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息,或者配置测量信息等。The BBU is the control center of the base station, which can be used as a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 120 in FIG. 9, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information, or configure measurement information, and so on.
在一个示例中,所述BBU可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU还包括存储单元2030和处理器2010。所述存储单元2030用以存储必要的计算机程序或指令,以及数据。所述处理器2010用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储单元2030和处理器2010可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or can respectively support wireless access networks of different access standards. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU also includes a storage unit 2030 and a processor 2010. The storage unit 2030 is used to store necessary computer programs or instructions and data. The processor 2010 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, used to control the base station to perform the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The storage unit 2030 and the processor 2010 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
应理解,图10所示的基站能够实现图8所示方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。It should be understood that the base station shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8. The operation and/or function of each module in the base station is to implement the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the above method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
另外,网络设备不限于上述形态,也可以是其它形态:例如:包括BBU和自适应无线单元(adaptive radio unit,ARU),或BBU和有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU);也可以为客户终端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE),还可以为其它形态,本申请不限定。In addition, the network equipment is not limited to the above forms, and may also be in other forms: for example, including BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU and active antenna unit (AAU); or Customer premises equipment (CPE) may also be in other forms, which is not limited in this application.
上述BBU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而RRU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented internally by the network device, and the RRU can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口。所述处理器可用于实现上述方法实施例中的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface. The processor may be used to implement the method in the foregoing method embodiment.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the above-mentioned processing device may be a chip. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的计算机程序或指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or a computer program or instruction in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的计算机程序或指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者实现本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments may be completed by integrated logic circuits of hardware in the processor or computer programs or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or implemented. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM, EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法,本申请还提供一种包含计算机程序或指令的计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机实现图4或图8所示实施例中任意一个实施例的传输数据的方法。According to the method for transmitting data provided by the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product containing a computer program or instruction. The computer program product includes: computer program code, which when the computer program code runs on a computer, causes The computer implements the data transmission method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 8.
根据本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机实现图4或图8所示实施例中任意一个实施例的传输数据的方法。According to the method for transmitting data provided by the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer realizes FIG. 4 or The data transmission method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 8.
根据本申请实施例提供的传输数据的方法,本申请还提供一种传输数据的系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method for transmitting data provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a system for transmitting data, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc), SSD)) etc.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in the foregoing device embodiments corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or sending in the method embodiments. In addition to sending and receiving, other steps can be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于, 在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component can be based on, for example, a signal with one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. achieve. Whether these functions are performed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (18)
- 一种传输数据的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting data, characterized in that it comprises:在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于指示传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;Receiving first control information from the network device at a first time point, where the first control information is used to indicate a target time point for transmitting target data and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the larger of the preset threshold value and the target interval, the first beam and the network device are used to perform the Target data transmission; wherein the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is the time interval between the first time point and the second time point , The time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold value And the larger value of the target interval, the second beam or the third beam and the network device are used to transmit the target data, and the third beam is the transmission corresponding to the second beam Beam, if the second beam is a transmitting beam, the third beam is a receiving beam corresponding to the second beam, and if the second beam is a receiving beam, the third beam is the same The transmitting beam corresponding to the second beam.
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising:若所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the preset beam is used to communicate with the network device The transmission of the target data.
- 根据权利要求1-3任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the time length required for beam switching at least comprises: the time length required to activate the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- 根据权利要求1-4任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the first control information is configured with information of the first beam; or, the first control information is not configured with the first beam Information about one beam, the first beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- 根据权利要求1-5任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the using a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point comprises:根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的所述第二波束,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;Using the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point according to the preset period for transmitting the other data with the network device and the preset second beam;或,or,接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示传输其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;Receiving second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the second time point for transmitting other data and the second beam for transmitting the other data;根据所述第二控制信息,在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。According to the second control information, use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device at the second time point.
- 根据权利要求1-6任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预设门限值和所述 波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the preset threshold value and the required time length for beam switching are determined based on a device capability state, and the receiving at the first point in time Before the first control information of the network device, the method further includes:向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Sending the device capability status to the network device.
- 根据权利要求1-7任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备包括云控制器、基站、中继站或接入点。The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the network device comprises a cloud controller, a base station, a relay station, or an access point.
- 一种数据传输的装置,其特征在于,包括:A data transmission device, characterized in that it comprises:通信单元,用于在第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于传输目标数据的目标时间点和/或传输所述目标数据的第一波束;在第二时间点利用第二波束与所述网络设备传输其他数据;所述第二时间点晚于所述第一时间点;A communication unit, configured to receive first control information from the network device at a first point in time, where the first control information is used to transmit target data at a target time point and/or a first beam for transmitting the target data; Use a second beam to transmit other data with the network device at a second time point; the second time point is later than the first time point;处理单元,用于若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设门限值和目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第一波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输;其中,所述目标间隔为第一时间间隔与波束切换所需时长的和,所述第一时间间隔为所述第一时间点和所述第二时间点之间的时间间隔,所述波束切换所需时长为将所述第二波束切换为所述第一波束所需的时长。The processing unit is configured to trigger the communication unit if it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to a preset threshold and the target interval, whichever is greater The communication unit uses the first beam and the network device to transmit the target data; wherein, the target interval is the sum of the first time interval and the time required for beam switching, and the first time interval is The time interval between the first time point and the second time point, and the time required for the beam switching is the time required for switching the second beam to the first beam.
- 根据权利要求9所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于:The device according to claim 9, wherein the processing unit is further configured to:若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔大于或等于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,且小于所述预设门限值和所述目标间隔中的较大值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用所述第二波束或第三波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输,所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的传输波束,若所述第二波束为发送波束,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的接收波束,若所述第二波束为接收波束时,则所述第三波束为与所述第二波束对应的发送波束。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is greater than or equal to the smaller of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, and is less than the preset threshold Value and the larger value of the target interval, the communication unit is triggered so that the communication unit uses the second beam or the third beam to transmit the target data with the network device, and the The third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is a transmission beam, the third beam is a reception beam corresponding to the second beam. If the second beam is When a beam is received, the third beam is a transmission beam corresponding to the second beam.
- 根据权利要求9或10所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于:The device according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the processing unit is further configured to:若确定所述目标时间点与所述第一时间点之间的时间间隔小于所述预设门限值和所述第一时间间隔中的较小值,则触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元利用预设波束与所述网络设备进行所述目标数据的传输。If it is determined that the time interval between the target time point and the first time point is less than the smaller value of the preset threshold value and the first time interval, the communication unit is triggered so that all The communication unit uses a preset beam to transmit the target data with the network device.
- 根据权利要求9-11任意一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述波束切换所需时长至少包括:激活所述第一波束对应的天线所需的时长。The device according to any one of claims 9-11, wherein the time required for beam switching at least comprises: the time required for activating the antenna corresponding to the first beam.
- 根据权利要求9-12任意一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一控制信息中配置有所述第一波束的信息;或,所述第一控制信息中未配置有所述第一波束的信息,则所述第一波束为接收所述第一控制信息所利用的接收波束或所述接收波束对应的发送波束。The apparatus according to any one of claims 9-12, wherein the first control information is configured with information of the first beam; or, the first control information is not configured with the first beam Information about one beam, the first beam is a receiving beam used for receiving the first control information or a transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam.
- 根据权利要求9-13任意一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 9-13, characterized in that:所述处理单元还用于:根据与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据的预设周期和预设的第二波束,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据;The processing unit is further configured to: trigger the communication unit according to the preset period of transmitting the other data with the network device and the preset second beam, so that the communication unit is at the second time point Use the second beam to transmit the other data with the network device;或,所述通信单元还用于:接收来自所述网络设备的第二控制信息;所述第二控制信息用于指示待传输的所述其他数据、传输所述其他数据的所述第二时间点和传输所述其他数据的所述第二波束;则,Or, the communication unit is further configured to: receive second control information from the network device; the second control information is used to indicate the other data to be transmitted and the second time for transmitting the other data Point and the second beam that transmits the other data; then,所述处理单元还用于:根据所述第二控制信息,触发所述通信单元,以使所述通信单元在所述第二时间点利用所述第二波束与所述网络设备传输所述其他数据。The processing unit is further configured to: according to the second control information, trigger the communication unit, so that the communication unit uses the second beam to transmit the other network equipment at the second time point. data.
- 根据权利要求9-14任意一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预设门限值和所述波束切换所需时长基于设备能力状态确定,所述通信单元还用于:The apparatus according to any one of claims 9-14, wherein the preset threshold value and the required duration of beam switching are determined based on a device capability state, and the communication unit is further configured to:在所述第一时间点接收来自所述网络设备的第一控制信息之前,向所述网络设备发送所述设备能力状态。Before receiving the first control information from the network device at the first time point, send the device capability status to the network device.
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器和存储器;A communication device, characterized by comprising: a processor and a memory;所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序或指令;The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions;所述处理器,用于执行所述存储器中的所述计算机程序或所述指令,实现如权利要求1-8中任意一项所述的传输数据的方法。The processor is configured to execute the computer program or the instruction in the memory to implement the data transmission method according to any one of claims 1-8.
- 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括处理器;A chip, characterized in that it includes a processor;所述处理器,用于执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令,实现如权利要求1-8中任意一项所述的传输数据的方法。The processor is configured to execute computer programs or instructions in the memory to implement the data transmission method according to any one of claims 1-8.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机程序或指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现以上权利要求1-8中任意一项所述的传输数据的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, including a computer program or instruction, which when running on a computer, enables the computer to implement the data transmission method described in any one of claims 1-8.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201980101458.7A CN114557083A (en) | 2019-10-25 | 2019-10-25 | Data transmission method, device and related equipment |
PCT/CN2019/113337 WO2021077412A1 (en) | 2019-10-25 | 2019-10-25 | Data transmission method and apparatus, and related device |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2019/113337 WO2021077412A1 (en) | 2019-10-25 | 2019-10-25 | Data transmission method and apparatus, and related device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2021077412A1 true WO2021077412A1 (en) | 2021-04-29 |
Family
ID=75620364
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2019/113337 WO2021077412A1 (en) | 2019-10-25 | 2019-10-25 | Data transmission method and apparatus, and related device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN114557083A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021077412A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2023056844A1 (en) * | 2021-10-09 | 2023-04-13 | 华为技术有限公司 | Data transmission method and apparatus |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN107733473A (en) * | 2016-08-12 | 2018-02-23 | 电信科学技术研究院 | A kind of wave beam management method and relevant device |
WO2019099827A1 (en) * | 2017-11-17 | 2019-05-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods for beam determination after beam pair link indication |
-
2019
- 2019-10-25 WO PCT/CN2019/113337 patent/WO2021077412A1/en active Application Filing
- 2019-10-25 CN CN201980101458.7A patent/CN114557083A/en active Pending
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN107733473A (en) * | 2016-08-12 | 2018-02-23 | 电信科学技术研究院 | A kind of wave beam management method and relevant device |
WO2019099827A1 (en) * | 2017-11-17 | 2019-05-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods for beam determination after beam pair link indication |
Non-Patent Citations (2)
Title |
---|
SAMSUNG: "Discussion on beam indication for PDSCH", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1717612, vol. RAN WG1, 13 October 2017 (2017-10-13), Prague Czech, pages 1 - 5, XP051352474 * |
ZTE: "Maintenance for beam management", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #94BIS R1-181024, vol. RAN WG1, 29 September 2018 (2018-09-29), Chengdu, China, pages 1 - 11, XP051517630 * |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2023056844A1 (en) * | 2021-10-09 | 2023-04-13 | 华为技术有限公司 | Data transmission method and apparatus |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN114557083A (en) | 2022-05-27 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
EP3668217B1 (en) | Bandwidth part configuration method, network equipment and terminal | |
US11569949B2 (en) | Communication method and communications apparatus | |
JP6657474B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for performing CSI reporting in a wireless communication system | |
CN111510267B (en) | Method and communication device for beam indication | |
US11895054B2 (en) | Information transmission method, apparatus, and device | |
US20220046735A1 (en) | Secondary cell activation method and apparatus | |
US20220103325A1 (en) | Method used for transmitting data, and terminal device | |
JP2022501964A (en) | Signal transmission method and communication device | |
WO2020057459A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for indicating wave beam | |
WO2020164454A1 (en) | Signal transmission method and communication device | |
JP2020503803A (en) | Communication method, network device, and terminal device | |
WO2020238617A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for determining cell activation delay | |
US11172543B2 (en) | Device and method of handling physical downlink shared channels in bandwidth parts | |
WO2020199902A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for selecting receive beam | |
TW201935983A (en) | Method for transmitting physical uplink Shared channel and terminal devices | |
EP3949573B1 (en) | Method and system for srs transmission | |
CN112020143B (en) | State information sending and receiving method and device | |
US20210337572A1 (en) | Data transmission method and communication apparatus | |
US12028282B2 (en) | Parameter configuration method and related products | |
WO2020187125A1 (en) | Data transmission method and device | |
WO2021077412A1 (en) | Data transmission method and apparatus, and related device | |
US20240137883A1 (en) | Information processing method and apparatus, and storage medium | |
WO2022133692A1 (en) | Method for state switching, terminal device, and network device | |
WO2021013138A1 (en) | Wireless network communication method and communication device | |
CN115039486A (en) | Method and device for recovering beam failure |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 19949939 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 19949939 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |